JP7312462B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A conventional game machine generally comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means.

Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-187648 A

However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not appropriately performed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of appropriately announcing an abnormality.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.), first control means (main control board 110) for performing predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and second control means (payout control board 12) for performing control according to the signal from the first control means. 0), and display means (first image display device 70) for displaying a game effect image and for executing a variable effect that variably displays a plurality of effect symbols, wherein the detection means includes first detection means (starting opening detection switch, etc.) for detecting game media,magnetic or radio wavesand a second detection means (magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) for detecting, and when power supply to the game machine is started, the initial operation of movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable on the player side rather than the display means can be executed,After displaying a predetermined image (initial screen) on the display means, the plurality of performance symbols can be displayed, and when the first control means and the second detection means are in a non-connected state (disconnected connector, disconnection, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predeterminedanomalyWhen a predetermined signal line connecting the first control means and the second control means becomes disconnected while power is being supplied to the gaming machine,Saidpredeterminedanomalynotification (Magnetic anomaly alarm, radio waveAnomaly notificationetc) is not executed, and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the first control means and the second detection means are in a disconnected state.anomalyThe notification is started after the predetermined image is displayed on the display means.anomalyThe plurality of effect symbols are displayed even during execution of the notification, and the predeterminedanomalyWhen the first control means and the second detection means are connected during execution of the notification, the predeterminedanomalyNotification continuedand when the first control means and the second detection means are in a disconnected state when the power supply to the game machine is started, the initial operation of the movable effect means and the predetermined abnormality notification can be executed.It is characterized by

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to perform abnormality alerting|reporting appropriately.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1 step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-stage change pattern determination table for the said icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the occurrence frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing, (b) is a view showing the relationship 1 of the occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, (c) is a view showing the occurrence frequency relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) is a view showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an advance notice scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit advance notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the change production|presentation at the time of winning. 1 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of normal change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of normal change pattern 01; 1 is a timing chart 1 of a character effect change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of character effect change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the character action change pattern 01; FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 42; It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 46; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 49; It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 58; It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/drive control part. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing origin return processing in a lamp/drive control unit; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp/drive control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of restarting power supply only to the main control board after stopping; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the icon change effect and the lamp change effect are restarted after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 84; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 86; It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/drive control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a game machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The game machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, and a game board 5 having a game area 5a where game balls flow down.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and is fixed to the island facilities of the game arcade via fixing members (for example, nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 can be maintained.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is attached so as to block the opening 8 from the rear, and the game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4 are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described later without entering the upper plate 11, and a shooting operation device 13 that can be operated to shoot game balls. and are provided.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two positions above the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice) effects. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The top plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a that slopes downward toward the shooting operation device 13 (toward the right), and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1), which function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions described later, are arranged side by side on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11.

The production button device 16 is provided with a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation on the production button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving the production button 17, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 17 can emit effect light by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is possible to perform an effect operation, and a button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing operations such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 2) connected to the cross key 19 for detecting an operation on the cross key 19, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending/returning operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the game machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game ball, and when the return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a receiving tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path, and while the receiving tray full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the game ball payout by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emitting device 15c for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, a lock mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the game machine 1 through this opening.

The shooting device 26 includes a shooting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the shooting member 28, a shooting rail 29 that slopes upward from the shooting member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a shooting position that is the lower end of the slope of the shooting rail 29. When the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member 37 for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a are provided at positions near the outer edge of the game board 5. - 特許庁A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-like decorative frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the interior, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. A warp device 41 for introducing the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the interior of the decoration frame 40 is provided on the side of the decoration frame 40, and a stage portion 42 for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior of the decoration frame 40 by the warp device 41 to flow down the decoration frame 40 is provided in the lower part of the decoration frame 40.例文帳に追加

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win (enter) are provided at intervals. 1 is paid out.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal pattern gate 44 (normal pattern starting area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, respectively. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start hole 45 (special figure start area) in which a game ball can always win (enter). When a game ball that has won (entered) the first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are paid out from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. . In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) for a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, there is provided a variable starting part 46 for converting from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win (entering a ball) to an open state (special mode) in which it is possible or easier to enter a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a winning lottery for a normal symbol).

The variable starting unit 46 is provided with a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can win (entrance), a second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2) that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 47, a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 2) for opening and closing the movable member 48. It is When the second starting port 47 is in a closed state, winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult, and when the second starting port 47 is in an open state, winning of the game ball (entering a ball) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three balls) are paid out from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Between the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting part 46, there is provided a prize winning hole lamp NR (not shown) for causing the surroundings of the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting part 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform light emission effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal figure gate 44 on the right side, there is provided a variable winning part 49 which is changed from a closed state (basic mode) in which a game ball cannot win a prize (entering a ball) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win a prize (entering a ball) based on establishment of a predetermined condition (winning of a jackpot lottery with a special pattern).

The variable winning section 49 is provided with a large winning opening 50 capable of winning (entering a ball) a game ball, a large winning opening detection switch 50a (see FIG. 2) for detecting the winning (entering of a ball) of a game ball into the large winning opening 50, an opening/closing member 51 for changing (variable) between a closed state and an open state of the large winning opening 50, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening/closing the opening/closing member 51. When the big prize winning port 50 is closed, the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult, and when the big winning port 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (entering the ball) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has entered a big winning hole 50 is detected by a big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are paid out from the game ball putting out device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is provided an out ball flow path that receives and collects the game balls that enter the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 and are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, and the game balls that flow into the out opening 39, collects them, and makes them flow down. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion. A game ball flowing down this out ball flow path and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. - 特許庁

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, and so on. A normal pattern holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, a right hitting display 67 (see FIG. 2) that encourages shooting a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a during a jackpot game (special game) or during a time-saving game state, and a state confirmation display 68 (see FIG. 2) that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set. An information display device 59 is provided.

Also, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). The probability of winning a jackpot (1/285 to 1/300) and set values (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed on the winning probability display sticker. It should be noted that the sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45, and the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifies) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. The pattern display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery for the normal pattern, which is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the normal pattern gate 44 (entering the ball).

The jackpot lottery with the first special pattern corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot determination (judgment information) when a game ball wins (entrance) in the first start port 45, and comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". When the jackpot lottery for the first special pattern is performed, the first special pattern display device 60 performs the variable display of the first special pattern, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the stop display of the first special pattern indicating the result of the lottery is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The jackpot lottery with the second special pattern corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot judgment (judgment information) when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot judgment with the jackpot judgment value to judge whether or not it is a "jackpot". When the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs the variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are respectively composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big win lottery.

In the present embodiment, "jackpot" refers to a state in which the right to execute a jackpot game (special game) is acquired in the first special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination) or the second special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination). The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 50 in each round game are predetermined, one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) enter the big winning hole 50 even before reaching the maximum opening times and the maximum opening time. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery for the normal pattern corresponds to obtaining a random number value for hit determination when a game ball passes through a normal pattern gate 44, comparing the obtained random number value for hit determination with the hit determination value, and determining whether or not there is a "win". When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) enter the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol reservation display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rights (first reservation storage) for performing the jackpot lottery (variation display of the first special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45, and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the first reservation storage. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rights (second reservation storage) for performing a jackpot lottery (variation display of the second special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 47, and lights up or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reservation memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal pattern holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rights (normal pattern holding storage) for performing a winning lottery (variation display of the normal pattern) of the normal pattern which is stored when the game ball wins (passes) the normal pattern gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of the normal pattern holding storage. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, ``7'' is stop-displayed when winning a jackpot lottery of special symbols, and ``--'' is stopped-displayed when losing, and extinguishing and ``--'' are repeated during variable display. Before starting the variable display of the special pattern, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so that the start of the variable display can be easily grasped by starting the variable display from extinguishing the LED.

A round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big winning state (special game state) occurs, starts lighting of the LEDs in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the big winning game, keeps lighting the LEDs during the big winning game, and extinguishes the LEDs at the end of the big winning game. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and is for displaying a right-handed display prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right handed) during the big win state (special game state) and the time saving game state, and the LED lights up during the big win state (special game state) and the time saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode to be described later or a setting confirmation mode to be described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is extinguished. Since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front face (surface) of the game machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set.

It should be noted that the installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be displayed so that it can be recognized which one is set. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the state confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the state confirmation display 68 may be blinked, or when the setting change mode is set, either the state confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, only the state confirmation display 68 may be lit.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display for indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or all the LEDs of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on.

At the lower right part inside the game area 5a, there is provided a sub-first variation display 81, a sub-second variation display 82, a first sub-holding display 83, a second sub-holding display 84, a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-hand hitting display 87 that encourages shooting a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-hand hitting). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, and the second sub-variation display 82 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, each of which is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED flashes (variably displays) at a predetermined interval, and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, the result of the big win lottery (lights up in the case of a big win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

The first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 may blink during the variable display of the special symbols and turn on or off when the special symbols are displayed in a stopped manner so that only whether or not the special symbols are being variable-displayed can be grasped.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories, and the second sub-reservation display 84 is for displaying the number of second reservation memories, each of which is composed of two left and right LEDs. When the number of reserved memories is '0', the left and right LEDs are extinguished, when the number of reserved memories is '1', the left LED is lit and the right LED is extinguished, when the number of reserved memories is '2', the left and right LEDs are lit, when the number of reserved memories is '3', the left LED is blinked and the right LED is lit, and when the number of reserved memories is '4', the left and right LEDs are blinked.

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, it may be possible to blink during the normal pattern fluctuation display and turn on or off when the stop display is performed so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being fluctuated display can be grasped.

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storages, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. The left and right LEDs are extinguished when the normal-pattern reservation memory number is '0', the left LED is lit and the right-hand LED is extinguished when the normal-pattern reservation memory number is '1', the left LED blinks and the right LED is lit when the normal-pattern memory number is '2', and the left and right LEDs blink when the normal-pattern reservation memory number is '4'.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a, a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display formed with a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a first movable member 73 imitating the face of a character is provided in the upper part of the effect space 40a. A circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the performance display, there are a customer waiting demo performance executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and a variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed during the variable display of the special pattern.

A display portion (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area, and the variable display of the effect symbols 70a is performed by scrolling the effect symbols 70a displayed in the respective variable display regions in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment).

Incidentally, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from '1' to '9', and the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in correspondence with (synchronously with) the variability display of the special design executed by the first special design display device 60 and the second special design display device 61.例文帳に追加That is, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the temporary stop display (swing display) of the performance pattern 70a is performed before the stop of the variable display of the special pattern, and the stop display (stationary display) of the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is performed in response to the stop display of the variable display of the special pattern. Incidentally, as the effect pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns indicating numbers, patterns indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

The ``temporary stop display'' means a mode in which the performance pattern 70a shakes slightly or is slightly deformed to give the player the impression that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (not completely stopped).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance patterns such as '777' or a combination of performance patterns with regularity such as '357', and the losing mode is other modes. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as ready-to-win performance, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) according to the result of the big win lottery, so that the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is increased.

Here, the ``ready-to-win performance'' means a variation mode in which a part of the combination of the performance patterns 70a reporting the big win is temporarily stopped and the other performance patterns 70a fluctuate, making the player expect the execution of the big win game. For example, when a combination of three-digit performance symbols 70a of ``777'' is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for reporting a big win, two performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at ``7'' in the left and right regions, and the remaining performance symbols 70a fluctuate in the central region.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are five types of ready-to-win effects, ie, "normal ready-to-win effects", "SP ready-to-win effects", "SPSP ready-to-win effects", and "full-rotation ready-to-win effects".

The ``normal ready-to-win performance'' is a ready-to-win performance executed in a state where a ready-to-win state is formed in which two performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in the left and right regions and one remaining performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region in a state where the background image before the normal ready-to-win performance is displayed.

The ``SP ready-to-win performance'' is executed after the normal ready-to-win performance, the performance pattern 70a in the state of forming the ready-to-win state is reduced and displayed at the corner of the screen, and a movie (moving image, animation, etc.) having a higher performance effect than the normal ready-to-win performance (high expectation for a big win) flows.

The ``SPSP ready-to-win effect'' is a ready-to-win effect that is executed after a normal reach effect or an SP ready-to-win effect, and a movie (animation, animation, etc.) with a higher effect (higher expectations for a big win) than the normal reach effect or SP ready-to-win effect.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In the present embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot lottery.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the ready-to-win effect is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win effect<SP ready-to-win effect<SPSP ready-to-win effect<all-rotation ready-to-win effect (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, in the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved (U1) which is the number of the current first reserved memories, a second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second reserved icons corresponding to the number of second special symbol reserved (U2) which is the number of the current second reserved memories, and a special pattern being executed (effect pattern 70a). An icon display area 70C is formed for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is partitioned in the form of a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and each display section 70B1 to 70B4 displays a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special symbol reserved number (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 first displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first displayed, the second display portion 70B2 displays the first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is secondly displayed, and the third display portion 70B3 displays the first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is thirdly performed. is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70B4 displays the first suspension icon H14 indicating the first suspension storage in which the variation display of the first special symbol is fourthly executed.

The second reserved icon display area 70D is partitioned in the form of a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed in each display section 70D1 to 70D4. That is, the number of second reserved icons is increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special symbol reserved number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays a second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first displayed, the second display portion 70D2 displays the second pending icon H22 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed second, and the third display portion 70D3 displays the second pending icon H23 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed third. is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70D4 displays a second suspension icon H24 indicating the second suspension storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed fourth. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "first reserved number" and the "second special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "second reserved number".

In the icon display area 70C, the icon TH is displayed when the first suspended icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first suspended icon display area 70B or the second suspended icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the second suspended icon display area 70D moves (shifts) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a), and the icon T when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) ends. H disappears (erases). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first reserved icon", the "second reserved icon", and the "relevant icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

The first movable member 73 is capable of performing effect light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is detected that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 is capable of effecting light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. omitted) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the performance positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not operate simultaneously so as not to collide with each other.

If the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, the other movable member may be moved to the performance position after one movable member moves to the performance position and returns to a position not overlapping the performance position of the other movable member.

Behind the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5 are a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores game balls supplied from island facilities and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a main control device 110A (not shown). A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the board 110, an effect control device 130A (not shown) incorporating the effect control board 130 for controlling the effect in response to the effect control command from the main control board 110, a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, and a game machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) is provided for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside.

The main controller 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin board case for housing the main control board 110, a sealing seal 104 for restricting the opening of the board case, and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the board case so as to cover the sealing seal 104.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or updating the set value which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game (which makes the degree of advantage of the game different), and a signal for shifting to a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting keys are input. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values, etc., which enables the actual performance of the game machine 1 to be grasped, are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is configured by arranging four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP side by side. Two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits constitute a numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information.

The substrate case includes a recessed lower case member whose portion facing the back side of the main control board 110 is open, and a recessed upper case member whose portion facing the front side of the main control board 110 is open.

A model name sticker printed with the model name (model name) of the game machine 1 and a management number sticker printed with the management number of the main control board 110 are stuck on the upper surface of the upper case member so as not to overlap the information display device 113 in the front and rear direction. At a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, an operation member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted. When the operation member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

An insertion portion (not shown) for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a. The insertion portion has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a tubular portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. When the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned rightward from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned on so that the setting key cannot be removed from the keyhole, and when it is turned leftward and returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key is removed from the keyhole.

The control number seal has an opener entry part for entering the name of the person opening the main control board 110 and an opening date entry part for entering the opening date of the main control board 110 side by side on the surface of a colorless and transparent base seal.

The opener entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and a transparent window area is provided between each entry area for visual recognition (visual confirmation) of the electronic components mounted on the surface of the main control board 110.

The opening date entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and a transparent window area is provided between each entry area for visual confirmation of the electronic components mounted on the surface of the main control board 110.

The first to fourth entry areas of the opening person entry area are adjacent to the first to fourth entry areas of the opening date entry area with a space therebetween, and a transparent window area is provided between the entry areas for visual recognition (visual confirmation) of the electronic components mounted on the surface of the main control board 110.

As the information display device 113, a performance display unit formed by unitizing a circuit section composed of four 7-segment displays and substrates may be mounted on the main control substrate. Even in that case, it is desirable to displace them so that they do not overlap in the front and back so that the model name sticker and control number sticker do not restrict (shield) the visibility.

In addition, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 may be mounted on a dedicated board, and board-to-board connection may be made to the main control board 110 so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110.

In addition, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but may be provided on the power supply board 160, provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or provided on the back side of the glass frame 4 if it is in a position where the player cannot operate. Even in this case, it is preferable to input the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a to the main controller 110m.

Further, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, a dedicated setting switch for inputting a signal for updating the set value may be provided separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or may be provided on the power supply board 160 as a position where the player cannot operate, provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or provided on the back side of the glass frame 4.

Also, instead of displaying both the performance information and the set values on the information display 113, another display may be provided on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, so that one of the displays displays the performance information and the other displays the set values.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing (corresponding to a volatile storage means). The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays) and transmitting predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the performance control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow command (data) to be communicated bidirectionally, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is configured to allow the command (data) to be communicated only in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 is connected to the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the gate detection switch 44a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the out ball detection switch 52a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, the information display 113, and the payout control board 120. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 is connected to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information to be notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) are output via the output port.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b include a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, a vector table area in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set, and HW parameters in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibition area are set. The areas are arranged in order.

In the game ROM area, a game program area storing a program relating to the progress of the game, a first unused area in which "0" is stored while access is prohibited, a game data area in which data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and a second unused area in which "0" is stored while access is prohibited are arranged in this order.

In the information ROM area, an information program area storing a program relating to the performance display of the game machine, an unused area storing "0" while access is prohibited, and an information data area storing data relating to the performance display of the game machine are arranged in this order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the information program are arranged in this order.

In the game RWM area, a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, a game stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are sequentially arranged.

In the game work area, a set value area for storing set values, a determination information area for storing determination information (a checksum to be described later) for determining an abnormality in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses are arranged in this order.

In the information RWM area, an information work area used as a work by the information program, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and an information stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the information program are arranged in this order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

The relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on the information program will be described below.

When the main CPU 110a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. Further, when performing processing based on the information program, the information data area is basically referenced, and the contents of the information RWM area are referenced and updated while using the information RWM area as a work.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after returning to the game program after the processing based on the information program is completed.

Immediately after starting the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all the registers used in the game program are saved in the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all the registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when the processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience does not occur when the information program returns to the game program.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 for driving the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 for driving the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, controls the game ball payout device 100, and transmits a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the performance control board 130, and the like.

An input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected with an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, a ball existence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, etc., and an output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected with a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100.

When a payout command is received from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to perform control to put out a predetermined number of game balls.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like.

When the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the shooting control unit 122 allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When the detection signal from the firing volume 15b detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the firing control unit 122 drives the ball feeding solenoid 11b and also drives the firing solenoid 28b so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. It is designed to shoot balls.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a hitting member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft. Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the number of game balls shot per minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The production control board 130 includes a production control unit 130m having a sub CPU 130a for performing arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b storing a production control program, a sub RAM 130c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, a display/audio control unit 140 for controlling the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the steering wheel light emitting device 15c, and the button driving device 17b. A lamp/driving control unit 150 for controlling the lighting device 76 for the board, the driving device 75 for the board, etc., and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and uses the sub RAM 130c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects. command).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. When a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a, the performance control board 130 performs processing for executing performance according to the detection signal.

The display/sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image, or controls the sound output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display/sound control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 having an overall CPU 142 for arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 storing an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 comprising a VDP (Video Display Processor) as an image processor, a CGROM 146 storing image data, etc. A VRAM 147 having a frame buffer or the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the VRAM 147, an audio control unit 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 storing audio data and the like, input/output ports, and the like.

The supervising CPU 142 receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the display control program stored in the supervising ROM 143, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the supervising RAM 144 as a work area, thereby controlling the image control unit 145 and the sound control unit 148 to execute various effects (output data and commands) according to the effect instruction commands received from the effect control unit 130m.

The overall ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and stores a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, animation patterns for displaying animation of effect patterns, animation scene information, and the like.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the image presentation, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes various information such as weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method, duty ratio, which is a parameter of brightness of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and generates drawing data that is the source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142) and image data stored in the CGROM 146. The image data is material data representing an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect pattern image, a background image constituting the background of the effect pattern, a character image, and an individual image such as a dialogue image. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32×32 pixels). The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

The CGROM 146 also stores palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. This VRAM 143 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), a frame buffer area corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, based on an instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147, reads out the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (such as an RGB signal) based on the read out drawing data, and generates the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and Various images are displayed by outputting to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) generate synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and output them to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second.

A general-purpose substrate 72 that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs the converted image data is connected between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). General -purpose board 72 has a bridge function that converts the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) 70 (main liquid crystal) that displays the image data, and the image format that supports the performance of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Absorbs the difference in resolution from when the device is connected and when the XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) 17 -inch LCD display device is connected.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the output of audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to the effect instruction command received from the effect control unit 130m, the lamp CPU 150a performs control (outputs data and commands) to cause the controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined effects.

Input/output ports of the lamp/driving control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80. Based on the various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a), lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the board lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 is performed. , the button drive device 17b, and the drive source such as the motor and solenoid of the board drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the game machine from power supplied from the outside of the game machine, and supplies the main power supply to the game machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the power failure (power failure), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 when power failure (power failure) occurs.

The power supply board 160 is provided with a power switch for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping the supply of main power to the gaming machine 1 so that it can be operated by a store clerk. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and supplies the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 when a power failure (power failure) occurs. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power outage), and the control state of the game can be restored to the state before the power cut off (blackout) after recovery from the power cutoff (blackout). A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability game state" and a "high probability game state" as states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and a "non-time-saving game state" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the movable member 48 of the second start port 47.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "non-time-saving gaming state" (2) Low-probability short-time gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "short-time gaming state" (3) High-probability short-time gaming state that is "high-probability gaming state" and "short-time gaming state"

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state", and this game state is referred to as the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because they are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the odds of winning a jackpot are set as low as about 1/300 in a special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, for example, when the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the degree of advantage of the game, is "1". On the other hand, the ``high-probability game state'' refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a big win is improved compared to the state of a low-probability game, and when the set value is ``1'', the probability of winning a big win is set as high as about 1/60.

Concretely, there are 4 kinds of set values, 1 to 4. When the set value is 1, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/60. In the case of , the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/290, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/58, and when the set value is ``4'', the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". In addition, the change from the low probability game state to the high probability game state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variable jackpot". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the ``non-time-saving game state'' refers to a game state in which the average variation time of normal patterns corresponding to the lottery result is set longer than the ``time-saving game state'' in the winning lottery of normal patterns performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and the opening time of the second start port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through a normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for normal patterns is performed, and the normal patterns are variably displayed on a normal pattern display device 62, but the normal patterns are stopped and displayed, for example, 30 seconds after the start of the variable display. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the ``time-saving game state'' means a game state in which the average fluctuation time of the normal patterns corresponding to the lottery result is set shorter than that of the ``non-time-saving game state'' in the winning lottery of the normal patterns performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and the opening time of the second start port 47 is set longer than the ``non-time-saving game state'', for example, 2.5 seconds when the winning is won. Further, in the ``non-time-saving game state'', the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is set as low as 1/128, and in the ``time-saving game state'', the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is set as high as 127/128. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In the embodiment, the ``time-saving gaming state'' is set so that the normal pattern fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the normal pattern lottery winning probability are more advantageous than the ``non-time-saving gaming state''. However, the ``time-saving gaming state'' may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a winning lottery of normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability game state is five times the probability of winning a big win in the low-probability game state (common regardless of the set value).

Also, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot lottery, a small win which is less advantageous to the advantageous player than the big win is not won, but the small win may be won with a probability of about 1/100, for example. In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning probability to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of big win), but conversely, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of big win).

In addition, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability game state and / or the high probability game state may be the same for all the set values (1 to 4), or for example, two or three set values (1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.) The probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability game state and / or the high probability game state may be the same.

Also, the set values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, but are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

(Types of jackpot games)
Next, the types of jackpot games will be described.

In the present embodiment, there are "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "third jackpot game" as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and "first jackpot game" and "second jackpot game" as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47. .

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is closed for 2 seconds after the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first jackpot game, the high-accuracy short-time game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

"Second jackpot game" means that the round game is executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability short working hours game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

"Third jackpot" means that the round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

In addition, the number of times of fluctuation display (in the present embodiment, 100 times or 10000 times described above) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the jackpot game may be expressed as “high probability number” or “time-saving number”.

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpot games is three, but the number is not limited to three, and may be less or more than three. In addition, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds in any jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game), but the opening time may not be 29.5 seconds, and the opening time may be different depending on the round game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of hits will be explained.

In this embodiment, there are ``first winning game'' and ``second winning game'' as types of winning games that can be won in winning lotteries based on the passage of game balls to the normal figure gate 44, and if the winning lottery is executed in a non-time-saving game state, it becomes a "first winning game", and if a winning lottery is executed in a time-saving gaming state, it becomes a "second winning game".

The "first winning game" is to open the second starting port 47 up to 0.2 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

"Second winning game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened until 2.6 seconds, then closed until 1.5 seconds, and then opened again until 2.6 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enters the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

Thus, in the ``time-saving game state'', game balls are more likely to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can proceed with the game more favorably without consuming the game balls than in the ``non-time-saving game state''.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply substrate 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and waits for activation of other boards in step S3. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is shifted to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is shifted to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S9 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or set is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the current set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113, and a setting change designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED. When the setting key switch 112a is set to OFF from the ON state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area as confirmation of the setting value. and perform processing for terminating the setting change mode.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed is performed. Specifically, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting change. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. When the checksum is normal (no abnormality in the data in the RWM area for game), the process is moved to step S11, and when the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area for game is abnormal), the process is moved to step S12 assuming that the control state before power interruption cannot be normally restored.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). When the set value in the set value area is determined to be within the proper range, the process is shifted to step S13, and when the set value in the set value area is determined to be out of the proper range, the process is shifted to step S12.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display device 113, and after transmitting an unrecoverable error specifying command indicating the occurrence of the unrecoverable error to the performance control board 130, interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt is set, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of the unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 after clearing the output port, and processing is performed to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply substrate 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the setting, the power switch is not canceled, and the power switch must be turned on with the setting changing operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (e.g., red) until the power is turned off, and an unrecoverable error sound ("recoverable error" + buzzer sound) is emitted from the audio output device 9 to indicate that an unrecoverable error has occurred. It is to output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "drawing device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S14 assuming that the RWM clear is to be executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state) to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130, and shifts the processing to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized. The initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (eg, red) for a predetermined period (eg, 60 seconds), and a power-on notification sound from the voice output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized. ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. When there is a setting confirmation operation, the processing is shifted to step S17 assuming that the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and when there is no setting confirmation operation, the processing is shifted to step S18 to restore the control state of the game to the state before power-off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, the current setting value saved in the setting value area of the RWM area for game is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113, and a setting confirmation designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

Further, when the setting key switch 112a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state by a confirmation end operation, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is ended, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is ended, and processing for ending the setting confirmation mode is performed.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed is performed. Specifically, a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, or the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting confirmation. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power restoration is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (“Power has been restored” + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the notification of power recovery, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2), a normal symbol storage designation command indicating the normal symbol reservation number (G), etc.) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved normal symbols, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value and the special symbol determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S25 performs an initial value random value update process of updating the initial value random number value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24, and if the power failure detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, performs processing to clear the output port in step S28, performs processing to calculate the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in the game RWM area in step S29, and saves the backup flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S30. Then, in step S31, processing for prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the system waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, so that cheating can be suppressed and the security of the game machine can be improved.

Further, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and the setting confirmation operation, it is possible to increase the security of the setting change, which is the most likely to be fraudulent, and effectively prevent the fraud.

In addition, when the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine does not cause trouble to the game parlor and the players due to the unexpected operation of the game machine, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, when the value in the set value area is out of the proper range, that is, when there is a possibility that the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change, even if the checksum is normal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, thereby preventing the progress of the game with a set value unintended by the game parlor side and improving the reliability of the game machine.

During setting change (in setting change mode) or setting confirmation (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, and to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back (back). That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, when it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program, the initial value "1" may be saved in the set value area, and the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, when it is determined that there is a backup flag (recovery of the power supply) and it is determined that no setting change operation has been performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program, the initial value "1" may be saved in the set value area, and the process may be moved to step S13.

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including the information indicating the current game state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the game state designation command indicating the current game state may be transmitted.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the game program calculates the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the checksum may be calculated by the information program. In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of all the RWM areas may be calculated, or the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either one of the checksums is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed, but the setting change start designation command may be transmitted instead of the setting change designation command, and the setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as processing for updating the special symbol time counter, processing for updating the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, processing for updating the normal symbol time counter, processing for updating the opening/closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process for updating the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for determining a special symbol, the random number for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number for determining a hit, the random number for determining a normal symbol, and the random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding initial value random value is set as a new cycle initial value to newly update the random value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs initial value random value update processing for updating the initial value random value for judging a big win, the initial random value for determining a special symbol, the initial random value for determining a hit, and the initial random value for determining a normal symbol, in the same way as in step S30.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, etc., and performs an input control process of setting predetermined data when there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol special electric control process for performing special symbol memory determination (jackpot determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening/closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), game state control, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal pattern memory determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electrical control process, the type of loss normal pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a performs payout control processing for transmitting to the payout control board 120 a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120, referring to later-described prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) and transmitting to the payout control board 120 a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning opening. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and performs magnetic/radio wave anomaly determination processing for transmitting a magnetic anomaly error designation command or radio wave anomaly error designation command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, large winning opening opening/closing data to be output to the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, special symbol display data to be output to the first special symbol display device 60 and second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 62, and first special symbol. A data creation process for creating data such as special symbol reservation display data to be output to the reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 and normal symbol reservation display data to be output to the normal symbol reservation display 65 is performed.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, start opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data, display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Processing and an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 are performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, processing is performed to count the number of normal payouts, which is the number of payouts of prize balls based on the winning of game balls into various winning openings (general winning opening, big winning opening starting opening) during the normal game state, the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a during the normal game state, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected by changes in the set values (irrelevant to the set values).

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number)×100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of the base storage area set in the RWM area for information.

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. The base storage area includes a first area for storing the normal base value for the current game interval, a second area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the three previous game intervals. A base value will be saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, a process of setting performance display data to be displayed on the information display device 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every five seconds is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, no timer interrupt is executed in the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, so that the number of payouts and the number of outs are not counted, the performance information of the game machine is not calculated, and the performance information of the game machine is not displayed.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. FIG. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110 . Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the winning ball counter (10 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for the winning balls is updated by adding the data indicating 10 winning balls, and the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entering the winning hole is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1), and then the general winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When a detection signal from a big winning hole detecting switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to a winning ball counter (15 winning ball counter) for a big winning hole used for winning balls to update it, '1' is added to a winning ball counter (D) showing the number of game balls entering the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and it is determined whether or not a big winning game (special game) is currently being performed. When a jackpot game is currently being played, ``1'' is added to a round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls winning the jackpot 50 to update (C←C+1), and the jackpot detection switch input processing is terminated.

When the current game state is not the special game state, the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) indicating the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific prize winning port (second starting port 47, big winning port 50) outside the winning period is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is larger than a specified number (e.g. 10), and the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is determined to be the specified number. In the following cases, the big winning hole detection switch input process is terminated.

When the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is larger than the prescribed number, it is determined that the fraudulent winning (illegal winning) in which a game ball wins (enters a ball) outside the winning possible period occurs, and an error designation command for fraudulent winning is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening detection switch input processing is completed. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting port detection switch input processing, substantially the same processing as the first starting port detection switch input processing shown in FIG. 6, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the number of general pattern reservations is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

When the normal pattern reservation number is less than 4, the normal pattern reservation number is updated by adding "1", normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random number for normal pattern determination, random number for normal pattern variation pattern determination) is acquired, an empty storage part is searched in order from the first storage part in the normal pattern reservation storage area, the acquired normal pattern determination information is stored in the empty storage part, and the input control process is completed.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first starting port detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, acquires special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for determination of special figure variation pattern).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reserved number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area is less than four in step S230-4. When the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is less than 4, the process is shifted to step S230-5, and when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) to update (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the updated first special symbol reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and stores acquired special symbol determination information in the empty storage units.

As described above, in the predetermined storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area, special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, and random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-determination processing, a pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, the special figure determination information (first reserved memory) acquired this time is determined before the special symbol variation display based on the determination information is performed, and a scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening prize designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the current first start opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start win-win designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start win-win designation command analyzes the first start win-win designation command, and can execute a pre-reading notice effect that executes a predetermined notice effect over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before and before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start win-win designation command. . Note that the pre-reading announcement effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76.

Regarding the second start opening detection switch input process, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation memory, the first special symbol reservation number (U1), the first special symbol storage designation command, the first pre-determination process, the first start opening winning designation command are respectively changed to the second start opening detection switch 47a, the second special design reservation storage area, the second reservation memory, the second special design reservation number (U2), the second special design storage designation command, and the second. The pre-determination process may be read as the second starting opening winning designation command.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special symbol processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special symbol processing data loaded in step S302, moves the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing (step S310) if the special symbol processing data = 0, moves the processing to the special symbol variation processing (step S320) if the special symbol processing data = 1, and moves the processing to the special symbol variation processing (step S320) if the special symbol processing data = 2, special symbol stop processing (step S3). 30), if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is moved to the jackpot game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is transferred to the jackpot game end processing (step S350).

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of special figure special electric control processing as will be described later, necessary subroutines are appropriately processed in the game.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing for determining a big hit, processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and processing for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbols.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more, determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more (is "0"), the special symbol fluctuation display and the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not a customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not a customer waiting state (a waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which is not executed is "0".

When the customer waiting state determination flag is ``0'', a customer waiting state specifying command is set in a performance transmission data storage area assuming that the customer waiting state has already started, and the current special symbol memory determining processing is finished while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=0, and when the customer waiting state determining flag is not ``0'', the current special symbol storing determining processing is finished while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=0 assuming that the customer waiting state has already started.

When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, various random numbers (special figure determination information) stored in the first storage part to the fourth storage part in the second special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the previous storage part, and the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the second special symbol memory specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the second special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a big win determination (big win lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a big win game. Specifically, the special pattern determination of various random values (special map judgment information) shifted from the first memory portion of the second special pattern holding memory area (special map judgment information), the set value remembered in the set value of the RWM area for the RWM area for the game RWM area (here is 1 to 4), and the current probability gaming status, height. Based on the probability gaming status, determine whether it is a "jackpot" or "losing" that runs a jackpot.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage parts in the first special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the previous storage part, and the first special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) after subtraction. Set the symbol memory designation command in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a big win determination (big win lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a big win game. Specifically, the special patterns of various random values (special map judgment information) shifted from the first memory part of the first special pattern holding memory area (special map judgment information), the set value remembered in the set value of the RWM area for the RWM area for the RWM area for play (here, 1 to 4), and the current probability gaming status, highly gaming state, high. Based on the probability gaming status, determine whether it is a "jackpot" or "losing" that runs a jackpot.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol determination processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when a big winning decision is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage part of the second special symbol reservation storage area, a special big winning symbol or a losing special symbol is determined based on the random number value for big winning symbol stored in the 0th storage part, and a performance symbol designating command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for performance. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when a big win determination is made based on the random number value for determining the special pattern stored in the 0th storage part of the first special symbol reserve storage area, a special pattern (special pattern for big win, special pattern for losing) is determined based on the random number value for the big win pattern stored in this 0th storage part, and a performance pattern designating command corresponding to the determined special pattern is set in the transmission data storage area for performance. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols. Specifically, when the big hit is determined based on the random number for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage part of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for the special symbol variation stored in the 0th storage part, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In addition, when a big hit is determined based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage part of the first special symbol reserve storage area, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation stored in the 0th storage part, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to perform variable display (blinking of the LED) of special symbols in a predetermined processing area.

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, so that the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=0 is set to special symbol electric processing data=1, preparations are made to move to a subroutine of special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing for determining whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=1.

When the fluctuation time has passed, the big winning special pattern or the losing special pattern determined in step S310 is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device 60 or the second special pattern display device 61, and the predetermined special pattern stop time (0.5 seconds) is set in the special pattern time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the big hit determination.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=1 is set to special symbol electric processing data=2, preparations are made to move to a special symbol stop processing subroutine, and this special symbol variation processing is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing to determine whether or not the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). When the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=2.

When the stop time elapses, when the number of times of reduced working hours>0, the counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the number of times of reduced hours, when the number of times of reduced hours=0, the time reduced game flag is cleared, when the number of times of high probability>0, 1 is subtracted from the counter of high probability and updated, and when the number of times of high probability=0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. When it is a jackpot special pattern, a time saving game flag, a high probability game flag, a time saving frequency counter and a high probability frequency counter are cleared, special symbol special electric processing data is set from 2 to special special electric processing data=3, preparations are made to shift to a subroutine of big winning game processing, and this special symbol stop processing is finished.

On the other hand, when the special pattern is lost, the special pattern special electric processing data is set from 2 to 0, preparations are made to move to a subroutine for special pattern storage determination processing, and the current special pattern stop processing is completed.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process for executing a first jackpot game, a second jackpot game, or a third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol set in step S310 (stopped symbol data).

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the driving data of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the number of round games (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls are won during this opening, or when the opening time of the big winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), output of drive data of a big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening/closing member 51.例文帳に追加This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the round game for a predetermined number of times (4 or 16 times in this embodiment) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, the special figure special electric processing data = 3 is set to special figure special electric processing data = 4, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and this jackpot game processing is finished.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines a high-probability game state or a low-probability game state, and performs jackpot game end processing for determining either a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special pattern (stopped pattern data) set in step S310, a high probability game flag setting, a high probability number setting, a time saving game flag setting, and a time saving number setting are performed, the special pattern special electric processing data is set from 4 to 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the present big winning game end processing is completed.

(Description of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.

The ``first special symbol storage specification command'' indicates the first special symbol reserved number (U1), and when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) increases or decreases, it is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130.

"Second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of second special symbol reservations (U2),
When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) increases or decreases, it is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" may be collectively referred to as "special symbol memory designation command".

A ``performance design designation command'' indicates the type (kind) of special designs to be stopped and displayed, and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when various special designs are determined and variable display of the special designs is started.

In addition, since the type of the special symbol ultimately determines the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends, the production pattern designation command can be said to indicate the jackpot type and the game state after the jackpot ends.

The "first special symbol variation pattern specifying command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 60.

The "second special symbol variation pattern specifying command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 61, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the special symbol variation display is started on the second special symbol display device 61.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern specification command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern specification command" may be collectively referred to as "variation pattern specification command".

A ``special symbol determination command'' indicates that a special symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is set in a transmission data storage area for performance of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when a special symbol is stopped and displayed on a first special symbol display device 60 or a second special symbol display device 61.例文帳に追加

The 'normal pattern determination command' indicates that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the normal pattern display device 62 stops and displays the normal pattern, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130.例文帳に追加

The ``starting opening winning designation command'' is for notifying the result of big hit determination (lottery) to the performance control board 130 in advance, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47.例文帳に追加

A 'big win opening designation command' indicates the start of a big win game (special game), is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to a performance control board 130 when various kinds of big win games are started.

A 'round designation command' indicates the number of rounds of a jackpot game, is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to a performance control board 130 when a round game of a jackpot game is started.

The ``jackpot ending specifying command'' indicates the end of the jackpot game, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 when various kinds of jackpot games are finished.

A ``normal pattern storage specification command'' indicates a normal pattern reserved number (G1), and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when a value stored in a normal pattern reserved number (G1) storage area increases or decreases.

The ``normal pattern designation command'' indicates the type of normal patterns stopped and displayed on a normal pattern display device 62, and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when various normal patterns are determined and variable display of the normal patterns is started.

A ``normal pattern variation specification command'' indicates a normal pattern variation time in a normal pattern display device 62, is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to a performance control board 130 when variable display of a normal pattern is started.

The ``opening designation command for winning'' indicates the start of a winning game (auxiliary game), is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to a performance control board 130 when the winning game is started.

The ``winning ending specifying command'' indicates the end of various auxiliary games, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the winning game ends.

A ``game state designation command'' indicates whether or not it is a time-saving game state and whether or not it is a high-probability game state, and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 at the start of variation of special symbols, the end of variation of special symbols (at the start of a big win game), and the end of a big win.

The 'power-on designation command' and 'power-restoration designation command' indicate whether power-on of the game machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command corresponding to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game state is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

A 'customer waiting state specifying command' indicates that a customer waiting state in which variable display of special symbols is not performed is set, and when the customer waiting state is reached, it is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130.例文帳に追加

The “error designation command” indicates that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 1 and the type of error. When the occurrence of a magnetic or radio wave abnormality is determined in the above-described magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process, the “error designation command” is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 when it is determined that a fraudulent prize has occurred in the above-described big winning hole detection switch input process or the above-described second start hole detection switch input process.

Also, when the payout control board 120 detects the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the fullness of the lower tray 12, or the payout abnormality, it is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c and transmitted to the performance control board 130.例文帳に追加

An 'error cancellation designation command' indicates that an error occurring in the game machine 1 has been eliminated, and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c or a payout RAM 121c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when the resolution of various abnormalities is detected.

A 'set value designation command' indicates a set value set in the game machine 1, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, specifically, after a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is transmitted.

(Main processing of production control section)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and if various commands have been transmitted, stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received. If a setting change designation command has been received, the processing for executing the setting change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command has been received, the processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen, and to output a power-on sound from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power failure restoration notification is performed. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a power restoration screen, or output a power restoration sound from the audio output device 9. note that,

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and when the customer waiting state designation command has been received, a process for performing a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output a customer waiting demonstration sound from the audio output device 9. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 12 .

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a game state designation command has been received, and if received, the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to determine whether or not the special symbol memory designation command or the normal symbol memory designation command is received, and when the command is received, the first special symbol reservation number, the second special symbol reservation number, the normal symbol reservation number, etc., stored in the sub-RAM 130c are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs look-ahead effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to determine whether or not a start-up winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command is received, and if received, processing relating to icon change performance, continuous advance notice performance, and lamp change performance as look-ahead system performance is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 .

The “icon change effect” is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by changing the display mode of the reserved icon and the icon. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

A “continuous advance notice effect” is a type of foreseeing notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
“Lamp change effect” is a kind of fore-reading forewarning effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp over one or more variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a performance design designation command, a special design variation pattern designation command, a special design determination command, a big winning opening designating command, a round designating command, a big winning ending designating command, etc. are received or not, and if they are received, a process for executing a performance corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a normal pattern designation command, a normal pattern variation designation command, a normal pattern determination command, an opening designation command for winning, an ending designation command for winning, etc. are received, and processing for executing performance corresponding to the received command is performed when they are received.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command is received, and if received, the processing for executing the error notification performance corresponding to the received error designation command or the processing for ending the error notification performance corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it outputs signals such as predetermined data, and transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. When the customer waiting state designation command is not received, the processing is shifted to step E300-4, and when the customer waiting state designation command is received, in step E300-2, a demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 13) for determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance is selected. Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is referred to, and one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is waiting for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect will not be executed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. When the demonstration standby timer is not 0, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed yet, and when the demonstration standby timer is 0, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is set in a transmission buffer in step E300-7, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. Four types of demonstration standby time of 30 seconds to 70 seconds are set as the demonstration standby time in the normal game state, and four types of demonstration standby time of 35 seconds to 75 seconds are set as the demonstration standby time in the specific game state.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored, the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the variation display of the performance symbols is completed (the variation time has elapsed), and the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the customer waiting demonstration performance is completed are different. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after the variable display of the performance symbols is finished (the fluctuation time has passed) and the performance symbols are statically displayed is longer than the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the performance pattern on the image display device immediately after power recovery is longer than the demonstration standby time after the variable display of the performance pattern is completed (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the performance pattern is statically displayed. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after statically displaying the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after power is restored is longer than the demonstration standby time after statically displaying the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbol is statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The sixth feature of the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that each demonstration waiting time in the specific game state (low-probability short-time playing state, high-probability short-time playing state) is longer than each demonstration waiting time in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 14, the look-ahead effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 .

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process for executing the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changing the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the relevant icon). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lights the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode is changed), and ends the current look-ahead system effect process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. When the start opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the contents of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-8.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning to the first starting opening 45, it is in the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning to the second starting opening 47. It may be provided that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the pre-determination results of advance suspension (suspension storage corresponding to the previously received start-up winning designation command) are all normal reach or less, that is, all the pre-determination results of advance suspension are normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach. If all are equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and if none is equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires the icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6, selects the final icon display mode determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, and determines one final icon display mode from among a plurality of final icon display modes based on the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the starting opening prize designation command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-10, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of pending memories of the special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for the winning icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination processing. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the preliminary determination results of the precedent suspension are equal to or less than the normal ready-to-win state, but the icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the precedent hold is not to perform the ready-to-win effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed to be to perform the ready-to-win effect. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable performance corresponding to the preceding suspension in which the ready-to-win performance is executed, and the change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the variable performance corresponding to the preceding suspension in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the ready-to-win performance is not hindered by the icon change performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, even if the result of preliminary determination of the preceding suspension includes the ready-to-win performance, the icon change performance may be executed, but the icon-changing performance may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) when the preliminary determination result of the preceding suspension does not include the ready-to-win performance than when the ready-to-win performance is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

The final icon display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the start winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of the final display mode of each icon, and the final display mode of the icon to be selected.

A CD icon as a normal icon and a blue character icon, a red character icon and a rainbow character icon as special icons suggesting the possibility of a big win (a big win game is executed) are set in the final icon display mode.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to the special icon increases in the order of (CD icon<) blue character icon<red character icon<rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms a big win.

Here, as a main feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach.

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode in the event of a big win, but it may be selected.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the reserved memory number of the special symbols corresponding to the start-point winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated with each other, and for reference, the advance change in each change scenario and the update state of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variation display (variation performance) executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command.

The change scenarios include a scenario (for example, scenario 01) in which the icon display mode does not change during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is not executed) but changes during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is executed), a scenario in which the icon display mode changes (the pending icon change effect is executed) but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is not executed) (for example, the scenario 02), a scenario in which the icon display mode is during the preliminary change, and A scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) that changes during execution of the change (in which the pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the display state of the icon is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (which may be a ready-to-win state other than the normal ready-to-win state) is executed in the preliminary change. When such a change scenario determination table is used, it is preferable to set various scenarios so that the icon display mode does not change during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win performance is executed, and the icon display mode changes during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win performance is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, but the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed than during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win performance is executed.

(Icon display mode update processing of effect control unit)
The icon display mode update processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing icon display mode update processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E520-1. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3 determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored. When the icon change scenario is not stored, the process is shifted to step E520-10 assuming that the power supply restoration which clears the change scenario from the sub RAM 130c occurs, and when the icon change scenario is stored, the process is shifted to step E520-4.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a pending icon that changes (updates) the display mode in the current variable effect. If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-5, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-8.

In step E520-5, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 19) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-6. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19, one pending icon change pattern is determined from among a plurality of pending icon change patterns based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect and the selection rate (%).

In step E520-7, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is changed or a predetermined effect sound (change sound) is output according to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing.

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon display mode updating process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 20 and 21) for the icon corresponding to the stage of change of the icon in the current variation effect from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the corresponding icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 22) for power failure for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration. The details of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-11. Specifically, a change pattern determination table for the selected icon is referred to, and one icon change pattern is determined from among the plurality of icon change patterns based on the icon change mode in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern.

In step E520-12, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is changed or a predetermined effect sound (change sound) is output according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing.

As described above, according to the icon display mode updating process shown in FIG. 18, when the power is restored during execution of the icon change performance, the icon change performance may be executed again in the fluctuation performance started after the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the termination of the icon change effect due to the occurrence of power restoration, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, even if the icon change effect is to be executed again in the variation effect that is started after the power supply is restored, the effect mode of the icon change effect is newly determined based on the current variation pattern, so that the change scenario before the power supply is restored (the stage suggested before the power supply is stopped) is not executed from the continuation. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when power recovery occurs during the execution of the icon change performance, in the variable performance started after the power recovery, the icon change performance may not be executed in the variable performance corresponding to the pending memory (special figure determination information) prior to the pending memory (special figure determination information) that triggered the execution of the icon change performance, and the icon change performance may be executed in the variable performance corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change performance.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

In the change pattern determination table for the pending icon, the mode of change of the pending icon in the current variable performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the pending icon change pattern to be selected are associated, and for reference, the pending icon change performance occurrence timing and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the disappearance of the icon, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during the change accompanied by the output of the sound effect, a character action change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the icon changes as an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point when the character appears, and the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the change effect. A pattern action change pattern 01 is set in which a change notification pattern indicating that the icon is to be set is temporarily stopped and displayed, and an action performance acting on the reservation icon is performed with the change notification pattern as a starting point to change the display mode of the reservation icon.

The change performance generation timing of the reserved icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable performance, and includes when the variable performance is started (at the start of the variation), when the variation performance is being executed (during fluctuation), and when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

As the stage of change of the reserved icon, 1UP for changing the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot to a display mode one step higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, or from a blue character icon to a red character icon) and 2UP for changing the degree of expectation to win a big win to a display mode two steps higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) are set.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
20 and 21 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, FIG. 20 is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by one step, and FIG. 21 is a table to be referred to when the display mode of the icon is to be changed by two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of change of the icon in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected.

As the icon change pattern, there are set a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of variation accompanied by the output of sound effect, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of sound effect, and a character action change pattern 01 in which action presentation acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point and the display mode of the icon changes when a character appears.

The change performance generation timing of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the variable performance, and includes when the variable performance is started (at the start of variation), when the variable performance is being executed (during fluctuation), and when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

As the change stages of the icon, 1UP for changing the degree of expectation for winning the big win to a display mode one step higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, or from a blue character icon to a red character icon) and 2UP for changing the degree of expectation for winning a big win to a display mode two steps higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, or a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon) are set.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo-continuous effect" is to make it appear as if the variable display of the performance symbols has been executed multiple times for the jackpot determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. It is a variable display of a special mode of effect symbol that performs re-variable display once or multiple times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relevant icon change pattern determination table for power failure)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an icon change pattern determination table for the time of power failure that is referred to when determining the icon change pattern.

In the icon change pattern determination table for power failure, the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, the final display mode of the icon, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the final display mode of the icon to be selected, and the icon change pattern to be selected are associated with each other.

Note that the icon change pattern, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon, and the stage of change of the icon are the same as those described in the change pattern determination table for the icon described above, so descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

(Relationship between change effect occurrence frequency between pending icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the appearance frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of change performance is higher at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the prescribed command than at the prescribed frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change performance is lower at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command.

That is, it can be said that the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon more easily when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change performance is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of change presentation is lower at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the prescribed command than at the prescribed frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

That is, it can be said that the display mode of the pending icon changes to the red character icon more easily when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is the change effect (win-time change effect) of displaying the hold icon with a special icon at the timing when the game ball wins the start hole (the first start hole 45, the second start hole 47) and the hold icon is displayed, and the normal change pattern 01.
In addition, the change effect that occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command is the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the timing of occurrence of the change performance has the relationship as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change performance of changing to a red character icon with a higher expectation of winning the big win than the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the change performance generation timing, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, since the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the prescribed command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change performance of changing to the blue character icon than the prescribed frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, it is difficult to change to the red character icon with high expectation of winning the jackpot in the early stage of the variation performance, but it is easy to change to the blue character icon.

(Relationship 1 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the changing effect generation frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect generation timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher for the pending icon change effect than for the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is lower than that of the pending icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change performance generation frequency and the change performance generation timing has the relationship as described above, the reserved icon is likely to change at an early stage of the variation performance, so that the player's expectation for the big win game can be pulled over a long period of time, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship 2 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the changing effect generation frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect generation timing.

When the change effect occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the frequency of occurrence of the icon change effect is higher than that of the pending icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change performance generation frequency and the change performance generation timing has the relationship as described above, the icon is likely to change in the period when the variation performance is late, so that the interest of the game can be improved by drawing the player's expectation for the big winning game until the time when the variation performance is late.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 23D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, when the hold icon and the blue character icon as the icon are generated (changed), the second generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed), and when the hold icon and the red character icon as the icon are generated (changed), the third generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). is output, and when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of icon change.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of a plurality of icon display modes (four types). However, two types of notification sounds may be used, namely, the notification sound generated when the CD icon is generated and the change notification sound when the icon changes to the blue character icon, the red character icon, and the rainbow character icon. Also, for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types of special change notification sounds may be provided.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the start opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E530-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is during the period in which the continuous announcement performance can be executed, the process is shifted to step E530-4, and if it is not in the period during which the continuous announcement performance can be executed, the process is moved to step E530-6 assuming that the continuous announcement performance is not executed.

The "executable period of continuous advance notice effect" means that the jackpot game is not being executed, the continuous notice effect is not being executed, and the continuous notice effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning to the first starting opening 45, it is in the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning to the second starting opening 47. It may be provided that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the announcement scenario determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effect. Details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later. This advance notice scenario indicates the transition of the advance notice effect over one or more variable effects.

In step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a determines the announcement scenario, sets it in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current continuous announcement effect determination process. Specifically, referring to the notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 25, one notice scenario is decided from among a plurality of notice scenarios (including non-announcement scenarios) based on the reserved memory number of special symbols corresponding to the start win prize designation command, the type of the start win prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario. Details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario in which the continuous announcement effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current continuous announcement effect determination process.

(Advance scenario decision table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an advance notice scenario determination table referred to when deciding an advance notice scenario for continuous advance notice effects.

In the notice scenario determination table, the reserved memory number of special symbols corresponding to the starting opening prize designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the starting opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the notice scenario to be selected are associated, and for reference, the advance change in each notice scenario and the performance mode of the notice performance in the change are described.

The advance notice scenarios include a non-announcement scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the notice effect is not executed in which an effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a at the start of the variable effect, a scenario in which no effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a at the start of the preliminary change, but an effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a at the start of the change (for example, scenario 01), and a scenario in which the effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a at the start of the preliminary change and at the start of the change (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) are set.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the variation pattern specification command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effect stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E540-3 determines whether or not the announcement scenario is stored. When the change notice scenario is stored, the process is shifted to step E540-4, and when the notice scenario is not stored, the process proceeds to step E540-6 assuming that the power restoration has occurred in which the notice scenario is cleared from the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines a continuous announcement pattern (effect mode) corresponding to the announcement scenario in step E540-4, and sets a continuous announcement effect command corresponding to the determined continuous announcement pattern in the transmission buffer in step E540-5. Thereby, a continuous notice performance command is transmitted to a display/sound control part 140 and a lamp/driving control part 150, a continuous notice performance is executed according to the continuous notice pattern, and an effect image is displayed around the performance pattern 70a or a prescribed effect sound is output at the start of the variable performance.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a selects an alternative notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 27) for determining whether or not to execute the alternative notice effect as compensation for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration, and determines the notice pattern. Specifically, a selected alternative notice pattern determination table is referenced, and one alternative notice pattern is decided from among a plurality of alternative notice patterns based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern. Details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

The 'alternative advance notice effect' is an effect for compensating for a continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power failure), and is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect that the big win game will be executed by displaying any one of a plurality of mini-characters with different expectations for the big win on the image display device.

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is for executing the alternative notice effect. If the alternative notice performance is not to be executed, the present continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated as the substitute notice performance is not executed, and if the alternative notice performance is to be executed, the substitute notice performance command corresponding to the substitute notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer, and the current continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated. As a result, an alternative notice performance command is transmitted to a display/audio control part 140 and a lamp/driving control part 150, an alternative notice performance is executed according to the alternative notice pattern, and a mini-character is displayed on the first image display device 70 or a prescribed effect sound is output.

As described above, according to the continuous announcement performance execution processing shown in FIG. 26, when the power supply is restored (power cutoff) during execution of the continuous announcement performance, the alternative announcement performance different from the continuous announcement performance may be executed without restarting the continuous announcement performance in the variable performance started after the power recovery. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous announcement effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power failure), and to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding an alternative notice pattern.

In the alternative notice pattern determination table, the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern are associated with each other, and the performance mode in each alternative notice pattern is described as a reference.

As alternative notice patterns, there are set a pattern 00 in which no alternative notice performance is executed, a pattern 01 in which a mini character A is displayed on an image display device, a pattern 02 in which a mini character B is displayed in the image display device, a pattern 03 in which a mini character C is displayed in the image display device, and a pattern 04 in which a mini character D is displayed on the image display device.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to mini-characters is higher in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is sure to win a big win.

A first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that an alternative notice pattern for executing an alternative notice performance is more likely to be decided for a variation pattern with a high jackpot winning expectation than a variation pattern with a low jackpot winning expectation. By doing so, the alternative notice performance is executed when the possibility that the continuous notice performance has been executed before the restoration of the power supply is more likely to be executed, the dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous notice performance can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that the alternative notice pattern for executing the alternative notice performance is more likely to be determined when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggers the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice performance prior to the suspension that triggers the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous advance notice performance after the restoration of the power source, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the variable performance to be executed after the power supply is restored, it is determined whether or not to execute the later-described big-hit foretelling performance (speech foretelling performance, step-up foretelling performance), so the execution probability of the big-hit foretelling performance may be increased more than usual, so that the alternative foretelling performance may not be executed.

Also in this case, it is preferable that the big hit notice performance is more likely to be executed when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggers the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed than the case where the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice performance prior to the suspension that triggers the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed. In this way, after the power is restored, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance corresponds to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous advance notice performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. When the icon change scenario is stored, the process is shifted to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change performance is executed, and when the icon change scenario is not stored, the process is shifted to step E550-6 assuming that the power supply restoration for clearing the change scenario from the sub RAM 130c has occurred.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp performance command is transmitted to a lamp/driving control part 150, and a lamp change performance is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the color change of the icon.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. When the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp changing performance execution processing is ended, and when the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp changing performance execution processing is ended.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c in step E550-7, sets a lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer in step E550-8, and ends the current lamp change effect execution process. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

Thus, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 28, the lamp change effect is executed by changing the lighting mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the icon change in the icon change effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by synergistic effect with the icon change performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change performance execution processing shown in FIG. 28, unlike the icon change performance and the continuous notice performance, even if the power source is restored during the execution of the lamp change performance, the lamp change performance is not executed again or the alternative notice performance is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to secure the rarity of the ramp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power recovery. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the prize winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. may be determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance may be executed.

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 29, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variation effect pattern determination process (the process of determining the variation effect pattern based on the variation pattern designation command) in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

At step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and at step E650-2, selects a big hit notice determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining the notice pattern of the big win notice performance making the player expect the big win game to be executed, and decides the notice pattern. Specifically, one notice pattern is determined from a plurality of notice patterns (including non-prediction patterns) based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern by referring to a jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. Details of the jackpot announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a forewarning pattern for executing a dialogue forewarning effect. If it is the announcement pattern for executing the speech announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-4, and if it is not the announcement pattern for executing the dialogue announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-6.

The ``word foretelling performance'' is a kind of big hit foretelling performance in which a speech image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed on an image display device in response to operation of a performance button 17 during an effective period occurring during a variable performance, and a voice corresponding to the speech image is output from a voice output device 9. - 特許庁Specifically, when a big win game is executed (higher expectation for a big win) than when the big win game is not executed, a line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, and when the line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the performance button 17 is vibrated, for example, for one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the dialogue pattern in the dialogue preview effect, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, a speech pattern determination table is referred to, and one speech pattern is decided from among a plurality of speech patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each speech pattern.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the speech pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a speech advance notice performance command is transmitted to a display/audio control part 140 and a lamp/driving control part 150, and a speech advance notice performance corresponding to the speech pattern is executed, so that the speech image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the voice corresponding to the speech image is output from the speech output device 9.例文帳に追加

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a notice pattern for executing a step-up notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is shifted to step E650-7, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination processing is terminated.

A ``step-up notice performance'' is a kind of jackpot notice performance in which step performance is executed in a predetermined order until one of a plurality of steps (stages) from a first step (first stage) to a final step (final stage). Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the big win game is executed (higher expectation for the big win) than when the big win game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, one step-up pattern is determined from among a plurality of step-up patterns by referring to a step-up pattern determination table and based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current jackpot notice effect determination process. Thereby, a step-up notice performance command is transmitted to a display/audio control part 140 and a lamp/driving control part 150, a step-up notice performance corresponding to a step-up pattern is executed, a step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an effect sound corresponding to the step image is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

(Jackpot notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a big-hit announcement effect determination process referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the big-hit announcement effect.

The jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be selected are associated with the big win notice determination table.

The notice patterns are set with a notice pattern without notice, a notice pattern in which a dialogue notice performance is executed, and a notice pattern in which a step-up notice performance is executed, and the degree of expectation for jackpot winning is higher when the step-up notice performance is executed than when the speech notice performance is executed.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141. As shown in FIG.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the supervising CPU 142, and the supervising CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, in step T1, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step T2, performs initialization processing. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step T3, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission for permitting timer interrupt, and in step T4, refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 to determine whether or not a performance instruction command is received from the performance control unit 130m.If not, the process proceeds to step T7.

The production instruction commands include a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like.

An animation group is a group formed by bundling one or a plurality of animation patterns, which are defined (specified) information such as the type of object that constitutes an effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) for displaying the effect image, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), the drawing method, information specifying the image display device for displaying the effect image, etc.

The types of animation groups include, for example, a performance pattern group for displaying the animation of the performance pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying the animation of the pending icon and the icon, a variable performance group for displaying the animation of the variable performance such as the background and characters, a notice performance group for displaying the animation such as the notice, and a special game performance group for displaying the animation of the special game performance.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, determines whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating frame update timing for updating the effect image displayed on the image display device (drawing a new effect image).

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 performs display list generation/output processing for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and is generated for each frame (frame update timing) of one unit or multiple units. In the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process to be described later, a display list for one frame is generated corresponding to the current number of frames in which drawing control commands are set according to the contents of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group with the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group with the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs, but the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs a drawing instruction process for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw the effect image based on the output display list. By executing this drawing command process, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and performs the process of displaying the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound list generation/output processing for generating a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 148. FIG.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is generated based on drawing frames when outputting new sounds.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output sound based on the output sound list. By executing this sound output command process, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sounds based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and output from the audio output device 9 is terminated so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing.

Although the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 may be stopped so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (addresses) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then shifts the processing to step T4, and thereafter repeats the processing from steps T4 to T13 in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit)
Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141, and this processing is executed by receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs command reception processing for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. Specifically, the process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt process is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of integrated control unit)
V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. The V blank interrupt processing is executed each time a V blank signal is received (1/30 second=approximately 33 ms) from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every time the display of one frame of effect image is completed (1/30 second=approximately 33 ms).

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs a counter updating process of updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, by adding "1").

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to the 'drawing frame buffer' and the 'display frame buffer' each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms).

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has switched, and terminates the current V blank interrupt process. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of the change effect at the time of winning)
34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed (changed to) a blue character icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal change period in which the normal change of the effect pattern 70a is performed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 45, the main control board 110 transmits a starting hole winning designation command to the effect control section 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is determined that the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed with a blue character icon when winning a prize, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is not started.

At timing T3, the image data c (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data b drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts to output the second generated notification sound. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data h (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Also, the image data i (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer to the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this manner, the output of the second generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared with the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound are started with a lag, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, while the output of the second generated notification sound is started in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the erasing of the blue character icon and the stoppage of the output of the second generated notification sound are performed at different frame update timings, so that the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Example of a change effect when winning a prize)
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed (changed to) a blue character icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), in a state in which the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon are not displayed, that is, in a state in which not even one reserved memory is stored, the normal variable performance for variably displaying the performance pattern 70a is executed.

Here, based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 45, a starting hole winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control part 130m, the icon change performance determination processing is executed, and "scenario 02" (the display mode of the first holding icon is displayed by the blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined as the changing scenario.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 36(b), in response to the game ball winning the first starting port 45, the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the second generated notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(c), a stop display is performed with a combination ("234" in this case) indicating that the effect pattern 70a that has been variably displayed is a failure, and the icon (CD icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36(e), a ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is variably displayed in the center variable display region while the performance pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display regions of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the variable presentation. The same applies to FIGS. 39, 42, 43, 46, and 47 below.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
37 and 38 are timing charts showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the blue character icon.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period during which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the image display device is in a state where the stop effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 for changing the first reserved icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is not started.

At timing T3, the image data c (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data b drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variable effect (timing at which the variable effect is started). At this timing, the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts to output the second generated notification sound. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data h (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, the image data i (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data h that was drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer to the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this manner, the output of the second generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared with the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound are started with a lag, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, while the output of the second generated notification sound is started in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the erasing of the blue character icon and the stoppage of the output of the second generated notification sound are performed at different frame update timings, so that the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when changing the display mode of the first pending icon to a blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (during shift).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the first pending icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, it is assumed that the stop display of the performance symbol indicating the failure is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39B, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 displayed in the second display portion 70B2 is changed and displayed to a blue character icon when shifted and displayed in the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the CD icon is changed to a blue character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(c), a stop display is performed with a combination (here, "164") indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is a failure, and the icon (CD icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(d), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(e), while the performance pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display areas of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, the ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is variably displayed in the center variable display area.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of character effect change pattern 01)
40 and 41 are timing charts showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance pattern 70a is performed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the performance control part 130m decides to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but the character or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is not started.

At timing T2, the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data c drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data d drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 63rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data e drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data g (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data f drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and display of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer to the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen g (character display) is displayed, but the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data i (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts to output the third generated notification sound. The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specifying command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, the drawing of the image data k (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, the display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen j (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data l (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this manner, the output of the third generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared with the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a difference in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the stoppage of the output of the third generated notification sound are performed at different frame update timings, so that the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Production example of character action change pattern 01)
FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character effect change pattern 01) during the variable effect.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), in a state in which the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon are not displayed, that is, in a state in which not even one reserved memory is stored, the normal variable performance for variably displaying the performance pattern 70a is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42(b), after the character C1 is displayed, the character C1 throws a kiss and an effect is performed in which the heart H is blown toward the icon (CD icon) TH, as shown in FIG. 42(c).

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 42(d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third generated notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(a), a ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is variably displayed in the center variable display region while the performance pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display regions of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 43(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(c), when the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, it suggests a big win, and the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed is stop-displayed in a combination (here, "222") indicating the big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 44 and 45 are timing charts showing various timings when the symbol effect change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the red character icon.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance pattern 70a is performed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is decided to execute a character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the first reserved icon to a red character icon, but no change pattern or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is not started.

Also, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and display of the image data c drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the normal fluctuation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period during which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, and the image data d drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, and the image data e drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data f drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the temporary stop effect display screen h (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9. The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specifying command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data j (background image, stop effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the temporary stop effect display screen i (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, the drawing of the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, the display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen j (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data l (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen k (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this manner, the output of the third generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared with the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a difference in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the stoppage of the output of the third generated notification sound are performed at different frame update timings, so that the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Production example of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the suspended icon is changed to a red character icon (symbol effect change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in a state in which the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, the normal variable effect of variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(b), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" in the left variable display area, "3" in the right variable display area, and "change" in the central variable display area is stopped (temporarily stopped display), an effect like a lightning bolt appears toward the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1, and when it hits, the first pending icon H11 is displayed. The display mode changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third generated notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(a), a ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is variably displayed in the center variable display region while the performance pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display regions of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 47(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(c), when the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, it suggests a big win, and the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed is stop-displayed in a combination (here, "222") indicating a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size, and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the effect control unit 130m executes a change effect at a frame update timing corresponding to receiving a predetermined command (starting opening winning designation command or variation pattern designation command), and there are cases where a change effect is executed at a predetermined frame update timing after the effect control unit 130m receives the change pattern designation command.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and scenario when the effect control unit 130m receives the start winning designation command, but the method is not limited to such a determination method. For example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time it becomes possible to change the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon). Further, only the final display mode is determined when the performance control part 130m receives the start-up winning designation command, and how to change may be determined every time when the display mode of the icon (the icon, the reserved icon) can be changed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are four types of display modes of the icons (the relevant icon and the pending icon), the CD icon as the normal icon, and the blue character icon, the red character icon, and the rainbow character icon as the special icons, but the number of types is not limited to four, and may be as many or as few as possible.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided to indicate that the likelihood of winning a big win is lower than that of the blue character icon and that it may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, it is desirable that the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the pattern action change pattern 01 (change performance occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) are not changed to the special icon because the expectation of winning the jackpot is lower than that of the blue character icon. In this way, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the pattern action change pattern 01 (change performance occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), which are easily changed to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for winning a big hit, do not change to a special icon.

Also, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the degree of expectation for winning a big hit related to the icons (the relevant icon, the reserved icon) should be increased in the order of (CD icon <) flashing CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the character action change pattern 01 and the symbol action change pattern 01, when the character C1 or the change pattern is displayed, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is always changed. When such a trick effect is provided, the execution ratio of the cheat effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) is higher than the change effect at the time of winning and the cheat effect for the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (variation). It is desirable to be able to execute only the fake effect for the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the pattern designation command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed multiple times during one variation effect, but may be executed multiple times. In this case, since the change performance at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change performance occurring at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command) have only one timing during the variation performance, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (the change performance occurring at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) can be executed multiple times. By doing so, there is a possibility that the display mode of the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) may change a plurality of times in one variable effect, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effects (the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is the frame update timing two frames after the number of frames in which the predetermined command (starting win prize designation command or variation pattern designation command) is received.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 was not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change performance is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the variation pattern designation command, but not limited to this timing, for example, the change performance may be executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the special pattern storage designation command or the performance design designation command.

In the present embodiment, when "normal change pattern 02", "character action change pattern 01", and "symbol action change pattern 01" are executed, the change effect is executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specifying command, but the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when an icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect for notifying that the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) has changed. However, in addition to outputting the icon generation (change) notification sound, the lighting device 76 for the board and/or the lighting device 10 for the frame may be used to emit a lamp in the same color as the color of the display mode of the changed icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon). . In this case, the lamps of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may start emitting light in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (the main liquid crystal), in the same manner as the output of the notification sound for the occurrence (change) of the icon. may be terminated).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the pending icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command) can be executed, but the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) may not be executable. By doing so, since the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set to have a short fluctuation time, by restricting the execution of the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change performance occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) executed during the fluctuation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without impairing the gameability of the first specific game state and the second specific game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the pending icon or the icon itself, but it is not limited to such a change, and without changing the display mode of the pending icon or the icon itself (the CD icon remains), a color effect indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot may be displayed around the pending icon or the icon, or a character indicating the degree of expectation of winning the big win may be displayed around (near) the pending icon or the icon. A character image (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-continuation") may be displayed in (neighborhood) to suggest an effect to be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the change scenario is determined regardless of whether the big win is successful or not. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from among a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the current number of reservations, the hit/loss of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%).

In this way, when the change scenario is determined with reference to the win or loss of the big win, when the big win is won and the red character icon changes, the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario changing to the red character icon at the time of winning is more likely to be selected when the current pending number is '3' or '4' than when the current number is '1' or '2'.
In other words, in the case of winning a jackpot and changing to a red character icon, it can be said that the selection rate (%) in which the changing scenario of changing to a red character icon is less likely to be selected when the current pending number is ``1'' or ``2'' than when the current number is ``3'' or ``4''.
In addition, when the big win is not won, that is, when the icon changes to a red character icon due to a loss, a selection rate (%) may be set to make it more difficult to select a changing scenario in which the icon changes to the red character icon when winning than when the big win is won and the icon changes to the red character icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, when determining the pending icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current pending number or the hit/loss of the jackpot, but it may be determined by referring to the current pending number or the hit/loss of the jackpot. Specifically, one pending icon change pattern may be determined from among a plurality of pending icon change patterns based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variable performance, the current number of pending, the hit/loss of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%).

In this way, when the pending icon change pattern is determined by referring to the current pending number and the winning/losing of the jackpot, when the big win is won and the red character icon changes, the selection rate (%) may be set so that the 'normal change pattern 01' is more likely to be selected as the pending icon change pattern when the current pending number is '3' or '4' than when the current pending number is '1' or '2'.
In other words, when a big win is won and the icon changes to a red character icon, it can be said that the selection rate (%) at which the 'normal change pattern 01' is less likely to be selected as the hold icon change pattern when the current hold number is '1' or '2' than when the current hold number is '3' or '4'.
In addition, when the big win is not won, that is, when the icon changes to a red character icon due to a loss, a selection rate (%) may be set so that the 'normal change pattern 01' is less likely to be selected as the reserved icon change pattern than when the big win is won and the icon changes to the red character icon.

As described above, when changing to the red character icon in the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect occurring at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command), the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the current pending number is '3' or '4' than when the current number is '1' or '2', so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
A modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

The modification of the first embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), a special symbol display area for displaying a special symbol TZ that is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is provided in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70.

Also, at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, the first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second reserved number display area 70F for displaying the second reserved number indicating the current second special symbol reserved number (U2) are also different from the first embodiment.

The first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F correspond to the first pending information, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D correspond to the second pending information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C corresponds to the execution information.

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
A specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a timing chart for starting a variable effect from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 49(a) to (f) and FIGS. 50(g) to (k) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F, and the pending icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number and the non-animated increasing display of the first pending icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a normal size on the first display unit 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 5th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) at which the number of reserved first special patterns (U1) is decreased from '1' to '0' and the fluctuation performance (variation display of special patterns) by the normal fluctuation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the decreasing display of the first reserved number by non-animation, and the changing display (decreasing display) of the first reserved icon to the icon by animation are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(c), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the change display (decrease display) of the first pending icon starts. At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(e), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TH, and the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the center variable display area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbols 70a in the central variable display area, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbols 70a in the right variable display area is started, and the effect symbols 70a are scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(h), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swinging state) in the left variable display area, and the performance symbol 70a continues to be scrolled in the center and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the right variable display area, and the effect symbol 70a continues to be scrolled in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (swayed) in the center variable display area, and the combination of the effect patterns 70a indicating that it is lost is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a "365". Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the reserved number of special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, the increased display of the reserved number and the reserved icon by non-animation ends in the shortest one-frame period (time), so that it is possible to shift immediately to the variable performance (decrease display of the reserved number and change display of the reserved icon) so as not to delay, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the notification sound output in synchronism with the start of the increasing display of the reserved numbers and the reserved icons continues until the (frame update) timing after the end of the increased display of the reserved numbers and the reserved icons (frame update), so that the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the reserved number of special symbols is reduced (changed from '1' to '0'), the decremental display of the reserved number by non-animation and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are executed, so that the player can surely recognize that the reserved number of special symbols is reduced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, since the timing at which the decrease display of the reserved number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the reserved icon to the icon concerned is completed (frame update), the change of the reserved number of special patterns is produced, and the player can easily grasp that the reserved number of special patterns is reduced by the reserved number, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, the performance pattern is not scrolled (not updated to the next performance pattern) until the change display of the reserved icon to the icon is completed, and the scrolling of the performance pattern (update to the next performance pattern) is started at the timing when the change display of the reserved icon is completed (frame update).

When the reserved number of special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increasing display of the reserved icon without animation, animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue longer than the increasing display of the reserved number. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the changing display (decreasing display) of the pending icon to the corresponding icon at the same (frame update) timing, if the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, either may be started first. By doing so, the degree of freedom of display control can be improved, and the fact that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased can be grasped at an early stage, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Instead of starting the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) at the timing when the changing display of the pending icon is completed (the start is delayed than usual), the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) may be started at the timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the changing display of the pending icon.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variable effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 52(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first hold number and the increment display of the first hold icon with animation are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1", and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display unit 70B1 and starts enlarged display. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 is terminated and the icon is displayed in the normal size.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases, the increased display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increased display of the reserved icon by animation are executed, so that the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the reserved number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the reserved icon is completed (frame update), the change of the reserved number of special patterns is produced, and the player can easily grasp that the number of reserved special patterns has increased due to the reserved number, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of the variable performance, the increase display of the reserved icon is executed over a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state, so that the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the notification sound output in synchronism with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronism with the end of the increasing display of the pending icon (frame update), it is possible to effectively produce the fact that the number of special pattern pending numbers has increased, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) associated with the increased display of the reserved icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) associated with the change display of the reserved icon to the corresponding icon, it is possible to emphasize the start of the variable presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon are not started at the same (frame update) timing, but if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, either may be started first. By doing so, the increase in the number of reserved special symbols can be grasped at an early stage while the degree of freedom of display control is improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be longer than the period of changing display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period for increasing display of the pending icon than the period for displaying the change of the pending icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 54(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) of FIG.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Also, "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, a first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the decreasing display of the first reserved number by non-animation, the changing display of the first reserved icon to the icon by animation, and the decreasing display of the first reserved icon by animation are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". Further, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display portion 70B2 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number is started, but since the changing display and the decreasing display of the first pending icon are being executed, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, are put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2", and the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are finished. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(d), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TH. In addition, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and continues to be displayed in an enlarged manner. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 ends and is displayed in the normal size. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the change display of the reserved icon to the icon and the reduced display of the reserved icon, even before the timing of completion of the change display and the reduced display (frame update), the increasing display of the reserved number is started.

In addition, if the number of holding icons to the icon to the relevant icon and the number of holding icons increases while the declining display of the holding icon is executed, the increase in the hold icon is displayed, and the output of the outbreak of the outbreak has been waiting (restricted), and the change in the hold icon is displayed, and the decrease display has been completed (the frame update). In the ming, the output of the hold icon and the output of the generated sound can be prevented from becoming difficult to grasp the trends of the special pattern holding, and the excitement of the gaming can be improved.

The notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the holding number instead of outputting the generating notification sound in synchronization with the increasing display of the holding icon executed after the increasing display of the holding number.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound (starting later than usual) at the timing when the changing display and the decreasing display of the pending icon are completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound may be started at the timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the changing display and the decreased display of the pending icon. By doing so, it is possible to suppress difficulty in grasping the transition of the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, even if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are on standby (restricted) in the same way as during the change display or decrease display of the pending icon. On the other hand, the increasing display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increase display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound may be started.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 56(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, respectively, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is continued in the central variable display area. Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area start to move to the upper left of the screen and to be reduced.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen, a confrontation production is started in which the friend character C2 and the enemy character C3 face each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first suspended icon) displayed in the suspended icon display area (the first suspended icon display area 70B, the second suspended icon display area 70D) is hidden together with the suspended icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is the same "7" symbol as the production symbol 70a, and is in the ready-to-win state.

The timing of T5 is the timing (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, increasing display of the first reserved number by non-animation is started, but since the SP ready-to-win performance (showdown performance) is being executed, the increased display of the first reserved icon and the output of the notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated are not performed at this timing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2", and the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not it is a big hit) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is temporarily stopped at a combination ("777") indicating a big win (becomes in a swaying state).

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(f), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a that has been displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (a state of being shaken). Also, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Then, finally, the effect pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a, "777". Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), even before the end of the specific performance (frame update), the increased display of the reserved numbers is started, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), the execution of the increased display of the reserved icons is put on standby (restricted), and the increased display of the reserved icons is started at the timing (frame update) when the specific performance is completed (the lost performance symbols or the jackpot performance symbols that have been displayed in reduced size are enlarged), so that it is possible to prevent the transition of the reserved number of special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increased display of the reserved icons is started at the timing when the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance) is finished, the increased display of the reserved icons is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so that even if there is an extreme lag between the timing when the number of reserved special symbols is increased and the timing when the increased display of the reserved icons is performed, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the increased display of the pending icon is started at the timing when the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so that the generated notification sound makes it difficult for the players to misunderstand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased at the timing when the specific performance ends, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Even when the reserved number of special symbols increases during the execution of the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), it is preferable that the increased display of the reserved numbers is executed while the execution of the increased display of the reserved icons is on standby (restricted), and the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase is collectively executed in one frame at the timing when the specific performance is finished (frame update).

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), the generated notification sound may be output in synchronism with the increasing display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generated notification sound.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
57 to 59, a specific example when the number of holdings increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. FIG. 57 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 58(a) to (f) and FIGS.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(a), "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively, and the icon TH is displayed. Further, the upper part of the screen displays the number of variable performances executable in the specific game state (here, ``remaining 0 times''), and the upper right part of the screen displays a right-handed image MU for prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending number by non-animation is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, are not performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2", and the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and the combination of the effect patterns 70a indicating a failure is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display showing the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and the characters "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific game state and the number of times of the big win games executed during the predetermined advantageous period "Big Win x 1" are displayed. Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the first image display device 70 additionally displays the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(f), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination "285" as the performance symbol 70a. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the second reserved number, the change display of the second reserved icon to the icon by animation, the reduced display of the second reserved icon by animation, the non-animated return display of the first reserved icon, and the non-animated increased display of the first reserved icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(g), in the first image display device 70, the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", and the second pending icon (CD icon) H21 displayed in the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the second display unit 70D4 displayed in the fourth display unit 70D4. Hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 start moving (shifting) toward the next display section.

In addition, the first pending icon display area is restored and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design). In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame timing (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(h), in the first image display device 70, the second suspended icon H21 moved from the first display portion 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TH, and the second suspended icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display portions, and the reduction display of the effect pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the performance symbols 70a in the left variable display region, the scrolling (downward movement) of the performance symbols 70a in the center variable display region is started.

In this way, when the first special pattern reserved number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is waited (restricted) while the increased display of the first reserved number is started, so that the player can be made to recognize that the special pattern reserved number has increased even during execution of the specific performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first reserved icon is started at the timing when (the last variable performance in) the specific game state ends (frame update), so even if the increased display of the first reserved number executed before that is overlooked, the increase in the first special pattern reserved number can be recognized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, when the increasing display of the first reserved icon is started at the timing when (the last variable performance in) the specific game state is finished, the increasing display of the reserved icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so that even if there is an extreme lag between the timing when the number of reserved special symbols is increased and the timing when the increased display of the reserved icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the increased display of the reserved icons is started at the timing when (the last variable performance in) the specific game state is finished, the generated notification sound is not output, so that the generated notification sound makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand that the reserved number of special symbols has increased at the timing when the specific game state is finished, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the performance pattern is not scrolled (not updated to the next performance pattern) until the change display of the reserved icon to the icon is completed, and the scrolling of the performance pattern (update to the next performance pattern) is started at the timing when the change display of the reserved icon is completed (frame update), so that the progress of the performance during the variable performance can be easily grasped, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Even when the number of reserved first special symbols increases in a plurality during the specific game state, the increased display of the reserved number is executed, and the execution of the increased display of the reserved icons is waited (restricted), and the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase can be collectively executed in one frame at the timing when the specific game state (last variable performance) ends (frame update).

In addition, when the number of first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first suspended icon display area 70B and the second suspended icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but only the first suspended icon display area 70B may be set (displayed) without setting (displaying) the second suspended icon display area 70D.

In the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed or not during the variable effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but may be set (displayed) on the second image display device 71, and may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display device different from the image display device (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.). And, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the special symbol pending number by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. This processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp/drive control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing to "1" for executing the origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17).

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. When the initial processing number is not '1', the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and when the initial processing number is '1', the origin return processing is performed in step R104, and the present initial processing of the accessory is finished. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are returned to the origin position, and the initial processing number is set to "2". Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. When the initial processing number is not ``2'', the current role initial processing is terminated assuming that the initial action processing of the role is not executed, and when the initial processing number is ``2'', the initial action processing is performed and the current role initial processing is terminated. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

In this way, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation processing for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are not executed at the same time. By doing so, the return operation to the origin position of various roles and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation and the initial light emission can be separately confirmed.

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 60, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. By doing so, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp/drive control section)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in lamp/drive control section 150 .

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". When the board accessory processing number is not "0", the processing is shifted to step R105-3, and when the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the first movable member 73 is set as an object to be driven to return to the origin, and the processing is shifted to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. When the board accessory processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105-12, and when the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the second movable member 74 is set as the driven object to return to the origin, and the processing is shifted to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the ramp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, updates the board function abnormality determination timer by +1 for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the movable member does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the movable member to be driven has a return abnormality, and the processing is shifted to step R105-9, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, the processing is shifted to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-10 clears the board accessory abnormality judgment timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is '0', the board accessory processing number is updated to '1' so as to drive the second movable member 74, and if the board accessory processing number is '1', the board accessory processing number is updated to '2' to end the processing of returning the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the performance button drive motor for moving the performance button 17 so that the performance button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, updates the frame accessory abnormality determination timer by +1 for determining the occurrence of return abnormality in which the performance button 17 does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, and the processing is shifted to step R105-17.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, sets "2" for executing the initial action processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number, and ends the current origin return processing.

Thus, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin positions at the same time (at the same time), but are returned to the origin positions in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73→the second movable member 74). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not the various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, and to prevent the inconvenience that both the movable members are damaged at the same time.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the operation of returning the frame accessory (the effect button 17) to the origin position can be performed simultaneously (simultaneously). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motion of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return motion of various accessories is never finished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, when both the return operation to the origin position of the board accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) and the return operation to the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed, the processing for shifting to the initial operation processing is performed. By doing so, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories can be separately confirmed.

Although the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin positions in a predetermined order (in the order of the first movable member 73 → the second movable member 74), the operations to return to the origin positions may be started at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial motions of various characters to be executed next.

(Initial operation processing of lamp/drive control section)
Initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. When the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and when the return abnormality information is set, the board function processing number is set to "2" assuming that the board accessory is not initialized and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of command at power ON and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. When the board accessory processing number is not '1', the processing is shifted to step R107-11, and when the board accessory processing number is '1', the initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If the initial action of the board role has not been completed in all processes, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the initial action of the board role has been completed in all processes, the board role process number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing product processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. When the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame role is performed, and when the return abnormality information is set, the frame role processing number is set to "2" assuming that the frame role is not initialized, and the process is transferred to step R107-17.

At step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. When the frame role processing number is not '1', the process is shifted to step R107-21, and when the frame role processing number is '1', in step R107-18, the initial operation of the frame role object is executed according to the frame role object initial operation pattern set in the lamp RAM 150c.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. When the initial motion of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and when the initial motion of the frame role has been completed in all steps, the frame role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-20. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing.

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 62, the initial action of the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) can be executed simultaneously (simultaneously). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial actions of various roles, and to prevent obstruction of performance actions of various roles during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessory, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 constituting the frame accessory, the initial operation of the production button 17 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete failure or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 62, the initial action process ends when both the initial action of the board accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) are completed. In this way, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the performance action, which prevents the occurrence of a state in which it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the performance action.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power-on, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 determined when a power-on designation command is received, patterns 04 to 06 determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating a customer waiting state is received, and patterns 07 to 09 determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is being played is received.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 does not operate, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→origin return, and the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent→origin return→large descent→origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue, resulting in the same as the initial operation pattern 03.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 or the initial operation pattern 04 except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described.

In the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

Note that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operation aspects of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 (the number of steps, operation of each step) may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be performed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be performed in the initial operation when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same at the time of turning on the power and at the time of power restoration when the state is restored to the customer waiting state, whereas the light emission state of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is resumed, while the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the recovery of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) differs between when the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state and when the power supply is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special pattern, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power is restored during the jackpot game.

As a sixth feature of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, regardless of whether the power is turned on or when the power is restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 but not in the second movable member 74, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 but there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74, the first movable member 73 is initialized. The point is that the second movable member 74 does not perform the initial operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of command at the time of power ON and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference.

The 'initial operation pattern 01' is determined when a power-on designation command is received, the performance button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration→return to origin→intermittent vibration, and the performance button LED lights up (lights) in the order of red→green→blue during that period.
The 'initial operation pattern 02' is determined when a first power supply restoration specifying command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state is received, the performance button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration→origin return, and the performance button lights up (lights up) in blue during that period.
The ``initial operation pattern 03'' is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that special patterns are being varied and displayed or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is being played, the performance button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration→origin return, and the performance button LED is extinguished during that period.

Note that the continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the performance button 17 are different from the time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance executed by operating the performance button 17 during the effective period generated during the execution of the variable performance (1 second vibration for the effective period for the big win advance notice to expect a big win, and 5 seconds vibration for the effective period for the decision performance to notify whether or not the big win will occur).

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role object (production button 17) differs between when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is to execute an action that is not included in the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

The third feature of the frame role-playing initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the light-emitting mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the frame role-playing object (production button 17) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role object (first movable member, second movable member) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The performance button LED is extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game, but the performance button LED may be lit in the same light emission mode as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is different from the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

The sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the light emission color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on includes a light emission color that is not included in the light emission color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

A seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the time during which the production button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the time during which the production button 17 vibrates during the operation production executed by operating the production button 17 during the effective period generated during the execution of the variable production. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial operation of the effect button 17 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is superimposed on the initial action of the production button 17, which detects whether it is at the origin position. By doing so, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. Here, a case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T9, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin processing is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) passes, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. The first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 complete the restoration operation in a state in which the first movable member 73 returns abnormally, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the abnormal return, and the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) passes, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. The first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in the state that the performance button 17 has the return abnormality, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 starts the restoration operation. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed. Initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. sound state.

At the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described, but in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command after the initial screen is displayed, so that the setting change screen is displayed. , the return motion and initial motion of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the production button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin processing is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 complete the restoration operation in a state in which the first movable member 73 returns abnormally, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the abnormal return, and the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in the state that the performance button 17 has the return abnormality, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 starts the restoration operation. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED are maintained to be turned off, the image display device displays a screen during recovery including characters ``Please restart the game'', and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at the time of power-on, a state in which the number of reservations is not displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E or the second number of reservations display area 70F is maintained because the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs the stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in such a state that a performance image such as a background image can be displayed (a pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "2", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the variable, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "2".

In addition, when the state after the power restoration is during the variable display of the special symbol (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the sub first pending display 83 at the timing of T2, and the basic operation flow from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 described above is the same except that the customer waiting state designation command is not received and the variable effect is not started at the timing of T9.

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally when the power was turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power supply line is disconnected to the main control board 110, or power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the disconnection state (including half-inserted state) of the connector of the power line. Second case, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected. Although there are the third case and the like, the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying characters "reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the performance control board 130 enters a control state capable of executing a performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started in spite of being in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of ``135'', which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

Although the first standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally is the first case where power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power (only the main power supply) due to the power line being disconnected (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and the third case where the command communication line connector is in the disconnected state (including the half-inserted state). However, the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying characters "reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the performance control board 130 enters a control state capable of executing a performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration specifying command for customer waiting is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed). Also, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

Although the second standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the second standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the second standby screen.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command is received, it may be configured to output a notification sound (alert, etc.) indicating (to be comprehensible) that the power is turned on. In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on includes a first case in which power is supplied to the effect control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state).The third case will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "reading" is displayed.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol storage designation command (the first reserved number and the second reserved number = 0) is received, the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain extinguished.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the state where the initial screen is displayed on the image display device is maintained, but the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect design 70a of "753", which is the initial design at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special design TZ is stopped (still displayed) for a moment. ) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped includes a case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 contacts due to an external factor after disconnection, and a case where the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes disconnected (including half-inserted state) and then becomes connected.

Here, a case will be described where power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of control states in which the production control board 130 can execute productions according to commands.

At the timing of T1, the return operation of various actors, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization of the initialization news have already been waited after the output of the initialization warrant sound has been completed. The 2nd waiting screen of the state or the customer waiting demo production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the directing button LED are lit.

When the timing of T1 is the state of waiting for customers after the completion of the variable performance executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, sub normal fluctuation display 85, sub normal rotation suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents. .

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation performance is finished, or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display content.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and in the image display device, instead of the second waiting screen or customer waiting demo production screen, the initial design of "135", which is the initial pattern at the time of the power, and the special plate pattern TZ is stopped. The first standing screen in the stopped display (still display) is displayed, and the initialization news of the audio is output from the audio output device 9, which consists of a sound of "RAM clear".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the waiting-for-customer lighting (white lighting) occurs.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during a control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the execution of the variable effect (loss change effect) or during the execution of the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, the screen displayed on the image display device will not be displayed until the power-on designation command is received at the timing of T4. Except that it is a variable performance screen (losing variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or a big win performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), it is the same as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. It will be.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command.

At the timing of T1, a customer waiting state has already been reached after the return operation and initial operation of various roles and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the image display device displays a second standby screen or a customer waiting demo effect screen in which the initial symbol 70a of ``753'' and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during customer waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the variable performance is finished, or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reservation display 83, the second sub display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen, the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of '753', which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after stopping after the origin return process and the initial operation process have already ended and the variable effect is being executed (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the variable performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variable display 81, the sub second variable display 82, the sub first holding display 83, the sub second holding display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure suspension display 86). preserves the displayed content.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is an initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and a stop sound ``Don'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variable performance is a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a production pattern 70a such as ``777'', which is a big winning production pattern, and a fixed screen in a state where the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the first sub-variation display 81 displays a big winning display mode indicating a big winning.

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED become the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but it may be turned off or set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Further, even when the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special symbol determination command, temporary stop display and stop display of the performance pattern 70a are not performed, and the variable display on the sub-first variable display device and the sub-second variable display device is not ended.

(Concrete example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted while the jackpot effect is being executed after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the jackpot performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T1, the big win performance (here, the first round performance) is being executed, the big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device, the right hitting display image MG suggesting the right hitting is displayed at the upper right of the screen, and the big winning special pattern TZ ("777") is stopped (still displayed) at the lower right of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first reservation display 83, the sub second reservation display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reserve display 83, the second sub reserve display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reserve display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for mid-jackets transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are put into a state of being extinguished, and the image display device displays a mid-jackpot recovery screen including the characters "Please restart the game (during the jackpot)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first change display 81, sub-second change display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-normal figure change display 85). , Sub-normal map holding display 86) maintains the display contents.

Instead of displaying the during-return screen for the middle of the jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the fluctuation performance shown in FIG. 79 may be displayed.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

Thereafter, when a performance control board 130 receives a round designating command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from a main control board 110, a normal big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device instead of the special big win performance (round performance) screen.

When the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the performance control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the normal ending performance screen is displayed.

Also, instead of switching to a normal jackpot performance screen when a round designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, or the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game is finished.

Also, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but it may be set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of extinguishing or the power restoration, so that it is possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

In FIGS. 77 to 80, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, the return action of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) is performed, but the initial action of the various accessories may be performed without performing the return action.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is initialized, the first initial effect pattern ("135") in which the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect patterns 70a are the first combination is displayed, and when the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect pattern ("753") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns 70a are in the second combination is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display suggesting the resumption of the power supply before displaying the production pattern 70a on the image display device, the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device when recovering to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device after recovery to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory/with hold memory (initial screen + return). display on the middle screen). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D) and the sub pending display device (sub first pending display device 83, sub second pending display device 84) can perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories, and when the power supply stopped in a state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply on the image display device ( During recovery screen display), the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display can be executed in the sub hold display. Thus, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen in which the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when restoring the control state of the game after resuming the power supply without being conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration performance.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, with respect to the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82), when the power supply stopped during the variation performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the variation display (blinking display) is not performed during the variation display of the special symbol even when the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the variable display (blinking display) may be performed by the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82). In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, for the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84), the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when performing variable display (blinking display) on the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) while the returning screen is being displayed on the image display device, the sub suspension display (sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84) may display the number of suspensions in accordance with the start of this variable display. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of various characters is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends). By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, presentation button LED) of various roles are turned off during the return operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the abnormality is notified by flashing red (abnormality notification mode) of the light emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when an abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification is continued until the next variable effect is started. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the initial operation of various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the production button 17) is performed from the timing after the production pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the production pattern 70a is displayed). When the control state of the game is restored, the initial action of various accessories is performed from the timing (during the display of the screen during restoration) before the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. By doing so, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 83, the sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display) when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a). 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending, the initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the board accessory after the player grasps the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when the power supply is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) indicates the number of suspensions while the screen during recovery is being displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a). The initial operation is performed after the mode is set. By doing so, the initial action of the frame role can be performed after the player grasps the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of various roles is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, at the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the performance pattern 70a is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp the end of the variable performance executed at the time when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, only the initial screen is displayed, and the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the effect control board 130 outputs a winning sound when a special symbol storage designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port is received when the control state is such that the effect can be executed according to the command. By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, when a variation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the performance control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command, the standby screen is not displayed and the variable performance is executed. By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, when a variation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which the performance corresponding to the command can be executed, the variable performance is executed without executing the return operation or initial operation of various characters. By doing so, it is possible to execute the production using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation and the initial operation during the execution of the variable production.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute effects according to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed. including light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed. including). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are already completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as in a customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the initialization notification sound is output again when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed, the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 is in a jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. Only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound may be output from the voice output device 9 instead of executing the recovery operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission).

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to the command, such as a return operation of various characters and a customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed, and the main control board is displayed. When the power restoration designation command is received from 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Even when the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, such as during the variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished or during the jackpot game, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed but the first standby screen is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission), when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed but the return screen is displayed, such as by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. . By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various roles and during the jackpot effect after the completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission), when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 after stopping, the initial screen is not displayed, and the returning screen for the mid-jackpot is received. is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished or during the jackpot game, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 is displayed. When the power supply restoration designation command is received from again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the performance control board 130 is continued in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, even if the power supply to the performance control board 130 is continued and the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

(Modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a modified example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

Here, a case will be described where only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted during the customer waiting state which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command.

At the timing of T1, a customer waiting state has already been reached after the returning operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the initial symbol "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during customer waiting.

Incidentally, when the timing of T1 is the state of waiting for customers after the completion of the variable performance executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device displays a standby screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed).

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 stops, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variation performance is finished or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern holding display 86) becomes non-display.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the waiting-for-customer lighting (white lighting) occurs.

Even when the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect after the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles has already been completed, the variable effect (loss change effect, jackpot change effect), or the jackpot effect (opening, round game, ending) is restarted after being stopped, the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 will be the customer waiting demo effect screen or the fluctuation effect screen (loss change effect). Screen, jackpot fluctuation effect screen) and jackpot effect screens (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen) are basically the same as the example shown in FIG.

(Modified example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the customer waiting state which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation of various actors, initial operation, and the output of the initialization newsletter are already waiting after the output of the initialization news, the production pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is suspended (indicated). The 2nd waiting screen or the customer waiting demo production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED are on the waiting button LED.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variation performance is finished or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern holding display 86) becomes non-display.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

It should be noted that even if only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles has already been completed, during the execution of the variable effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect), or during the execution of the jackpot effect (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 will be the customer waiting demo effect screen or the fluctuation effect screen (loss change effect). 78 to 80 except for the fact that it is a screen, jackpot fluctuation effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen).

In FIGS. 81 and 82, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored, but the initial actions of the various roles may be performed without performing the restoration.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen displaying the production pattern 70a is switched to an initial screen different from the standby screen. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off during the display of the initial screen. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Instead of starting the initial actions of various characters from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, the initial actions of various characters may be started from the timing of switching to the initial screen or from the timing until the switching from the initial screen to the standby screen.

Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen at the stage of receiving a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command). In this case, the initial actions of various roles may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen or the timing until the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial actions of the various roles may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial action of various characters may be started at the timing when the non-display state is switched to the initial screen or the timing until the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial action of the various characters may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin processing is completed in a state where the return abnormality occurs in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed, lighting during customer waiting (white lighting) is performed, and the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. The first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

Even when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation is not executed not only for the movable member with the return abnormality, but also for the movable member without the return abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation performance, jackpot game), and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a restoration abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the restoration abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial action is executed for the presentation button 17 that has no risk of colliding with the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74. By doing so, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and an abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect button LED provided in the effect button 17 does not blink in red to notify the return abnormality, but performs initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the performance button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(An example of the effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
FIGS. 84 and 85 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, it is assumed that the losing effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect for executing the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the icon change performance is started by changing the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C to a red character icon, and the lamp change performance is started by changing the state where the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished to the red flashing state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(c), the production pattern 70a of "3" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, and the ready-to-win production (normal reach) is executed in which the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in the central fluctuation display area.

Then, when it develops into SP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 84(d), SP ready-to-win performance is started, performance pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and first pending icon display area 70B and second pending icon display area 70D are erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when the SPSP ready-to-win game develops, as shown in FIG. 84(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 84(f).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 85(g), the image display device displays an initial screen including characters of "reading", but the win-win lamp NR remains extinguished.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 85(h), a return screen containing characters "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device over the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (including the promotion effect execution period for whether or not the temporary stopped jackpot effect pattern is promoted to a jackpot effect pattern of higher value for the player). maintained.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that causes a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. The variable performance ends without being restarted.

At this time, the same CD icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display part 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed by displaying the rectangular area image.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. A combination of performance patterns different from the ready-to-win combination of performance patterns) and a stop screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the variable performance is completed without resuming the lamp change performance at the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which the normal variation is performed, variation performance in which the shortened variation is performed, variation performance in which the normal reach performance is performed, and variable performance in which the SP reach performance is performed) are also performed. A combination of the same performance symbols or a combination of different performance symbols as the ready-to-win combination of the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state is stop-displayed (statically displayed).

As for the special pattern TZ, regardless of whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) with the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination as the performance pattern 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 85(l), the image display device starts an opening effect including information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that it is the first jackpot game), and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

While the winning opening lamp NR remains extinguished during the display of the initial screen and/or the returning screen, the winning opening lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change performance (does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot).

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, after the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), after the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stopped and displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the fluctuation time of the special pattern has passed and a special design confirmation command (in the case of shifting to the customer waiting state after that, when the special design confirmation command is missed, the customer waiting state designation command) is received. Temporary stop display of the production design 70a. The production pattern 70a is stopped (stationary display) instead of (shaking fluctuation/swing display). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the production pattern 70a is stop-displayed (statically displayed) after the power supply stopped during execution of the loss variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the combination of the production patterns which are the initial patterns at the time of power restoration is stop-displayed (statically displayed) instead of the normal loss production pattern. By doing so, it is possible to dispense with complicated processing such as determining a performance pattern to be stopped (statically displayed) by lottery, and to comprehend that the control state of the game is restored and that the variable performance executed when the power supply is stopped is completed.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, after the power supply stopped during execution of the big hit variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the production patterns are stopped and displayed (still displayed), the combinations of the big hit production patterns are stopped and displayed (still displayed). By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the control state of the game is the restoration of the power source and that the variable performance executed when the power supply is stopped was the big win variable performance.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the combination of the jackpot production patterns is stopped (statically displayed) after the game control state is restored, the ready-to-win state is formed before the power supply is stopped. By doing so, the player does not have to be conscious of the jackpot effect pattern which was scheduled to be displayed stopped before the power supply is stopped, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted can be reduced.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the execution period of the promotion performance described above is included in the variable performance executed when the power supply is stopped, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the promotion performance is not executed and the jackpot performance pattern is stopped (still displayed). By doing so, since useless performance is not performed until the performance pattern is stopped (still displayed), the player can immediately grasp that the variable performance being executed when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variable performance.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the display mode (type of display screen, display order of the display screens) of the image display device after resuming the power supply is the same in the case where the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is restarted and the game control state is restored, and the case where the power supply stopped during the execution of the big hit fluctuation production is restarted and the game control state is restored. By doing so, it is possible to perform simple display control without being conscious of whether the losing variation performance is being executed or the big win variation performance is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after restarting the power supply can be reduced.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, after the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol TZ is displayed in the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped, and is stop-displayed (statically displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the production symbol 70a. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the power supply stopped during the display of the icon is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a square area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C until the next variable production (scrolling of the production pattern 70a) is started after the display of the returning screen is finished, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state where the production image such as the background image can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the power supply stopped during the display of the pending icon is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a square area image is displayed in the holding icon display area until the next variable production is started, so that the holding icon is displayed in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed, and the holding icon is displayed. By doing so, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable performance is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

84 and 85, when the control state of the game is restored by restarting the stopped power supply during the variation effect corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (storage of the special figure determination information that changes the lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) of the winning entrance lamp NR to the high expectation of winning the jackpot (blue, red, rainbow)), the lamp change effect is not restarted, and the winning opening lamp NR is set to a notification mode (lights off or white lighting) that does not suggest the expectation of winning the jackpot. are By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player is puzzled by resuming the lamp change performance even though the variation performance is not executed while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation performance, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed.

Also, after the execution period of the big win variable performance is over, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen may not be displayed and the opening performance of the big win game in which the big win performance pattern 70a is not displayed may be started. In addition, information indicating the type of the jackpot game may be displayed in the opening performance, the jackpot special pattern TZ of '777' may be displayed, or the special pattern TZ of '753' which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss variation performance ends, the performance pattern 70a which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration and the special pattern TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big win variation performance ends, the opening performance of the big win game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific performance that arouses whether or not a big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win performance pattern 70a in the variable performance (makes people expect that the big win game will be executed), after the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is stopped (statically displayed) if it is a loss, and the big winning performance pattern 70a is stopped (statically displayed) if it is a big win. can be

In addition, when the combination of the big winning performance symbols is displayed (still displayed) after the control state of the game is restored, one of the combinations of a plurality of big winning performance symbols corresponding to the kind of the big winning game to be executed thereafter may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is ``333'' and ``777'', the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is ``222'', ``444'', ``666'' and ``888'', and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is ``111'', ``555'' and ``999''. .

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before stopping the power supply is ``1↓1'' constituting a part of the combination of the big-win performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third big winning game, when the big-winning game to be executed after that is the first big winning game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of big winning performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and the big winning game to be executed after that is the third big winning. In the case of a game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (combination of jackpot performance symbols which are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combinations of performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special pattern TZ may be stop-displayed (statically displayed) with a number different from the performance pattern 70a after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, instead of being stop-displayed (statically-displayed) with the same combination of numbers as the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, when the normal game state and customer waiting state are after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed (static display). You may make it

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B, it is assumed that the losing effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect that is the preliminary change is started, as shown in FIG. 86B, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a for starting the variable display to start the first performance of the continuous advance notice performance, the display mode of the first pending icon (icon final display mode=red character icon) shift-displayed in the second display part 70B2 is changed to the blue character icon to start the pending icon change performance, and accordingly, the lamp change performance is started by changing the state of the winning opening lamp NR from the extinguished state to the blue flashing state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 86(d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the losing effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect as a preliminary change is started, as shown in FIG. 86(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a for starting the variable display, so that the second performance of the continuous advance notice performance is started, and the pending icon change performance and the lamp change performance are continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 86(g).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, the image display device displays an initial screen including characters of "reading" as shown in FIG.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 87(i), the image display device displays the screen during recovery including the characters "Please restart the game" over the execution period of the preliminary variation, but the winning hole lamp NR is maintained in the extinguished state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the preliminary variation ends (the performance control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a failure), as shown in FIG.

At this time, the CD icon, which is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped, is displayed in the first display part 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the rectangular area image is displayed, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable performance for executing the SPSP ready-to-win performance is started, as shown in FIG. 87(k), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display part 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, when a lottery for the newly executed icon change performance is won, the icon change performance is started by changing the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C to a blue character icon according to the result. On the other hand, since the lottery relating to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the lamp change effect is not restarted while the prize winning opening lamp NR is kept turned off.

Also, when a lottery relating to the substitute foretelling performance performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the substitute foretelling performance is executed by moving the mini character MCB so as to be out of the frame.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(l), the words uttered by the ally A are displayed in the word window displayed on the image display device, and the voice corresponding to the words ``Chance is coming!''

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(m), the production pattern 70a of "3" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, and the ready-to-win production (normal reach) is executed in which the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in the central fluctuation display area.

After that, when it develops into SP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 87(n), the SP ready-to-win effect is started, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 87(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a big hit ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG.

While the winning opening lamp NR remains extinguished during the display of the initial screen and/or the returning screen, the winning opening lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change performance (does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot).

In addition, when the special pattern determination command cannot be received during the fluctuation performance (temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) is continued without the stop display of the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped (shake fluctuation).

Thus, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply stopped during execution of the continuous advance notice performance, the alternative notice performance different from the continuous notice performance can be executed without restarting the continuous notice performance in the variable performance corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice performance due to the stoppage of the power supply, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply stopped during the display of the suspended icon displayed as the special icon (including the case where the final display mode has not changed and the case where the final display mode has changed), the suspended icon displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the power supply stopped during execution of the icon change performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, in the variable performance corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of recovery, the pending icon change performance is not executed, but the icon change performance can be executed again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, during the execution of the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration, even if the icon change production is executed again, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply is stopped. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

86 and 87, even if the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that has been stopped during the variation effect (storage of the special figure determination information that changes the lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) of the winning entrance lamp NR to the lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) with high expectation of winning the jackpot) corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is not restarted, and the winning entrance lamp NR is set to the notification mode (light off or white lighting) that does not suggest the expectation of winning the big win. It's like By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player is puzzled by resuming the lamp change performance even though the variation performance is not executed while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted.

(Concrete example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detecting means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, it is assumed that wires from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110.

First, FIG. 88(a) will be described.
FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed).

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start opening detection switch 45a is unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of the connection error, and the performance control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including characters of ``connection error detection'' indicating that a connection error has occurred, and a voice output device 9 outputs a connection error notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying ``connection error''.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released, but the connection error notification continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 88(b) will be described.
FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting door detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed).

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-inserted and the first start opening detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a become unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the effect control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error annunciation image EG containing the characters "magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "radio error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the characters "connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first start port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, the radio wave error, and the connection error have been released, but various error notifications continue until the game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, when the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the occurrence of the connection error is not detected by the main control board 110, and the error notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, when specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) connected to the main control board 110 changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error notification is made. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-inserted, disconnection, fraudulent act), and to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, even when specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) returns from the disconnected state to the connected state, the error notification of the magnetic error or radio wave error continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts with respect to the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the error notification is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected, various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification in the same notification mode as in FIG. 88) may be performed during display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (at the start of display of the first standby screen or second standby screen).

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the disconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the connection error notification may be canceled when the first starting port detection switch 45a changes from the disconnected state to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent conduct is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the radio error notification sound associated with a radio wave error having a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error and the connection error notification sound associated with a connection error having a lower priority (importance) than a radio error are not output if they occur simultaneously with a magnetic error, but the notification sounds associated with the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Further, in the magnetic error notification, the radio wave error notification, and the connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may not be output.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control section 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 .
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as those of the role product initial process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted, and the different processes will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. If the power-on command is received, the process proceeds to step R102B, and if the power-on command is not received, the process proceeds to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the previous power-on) has passed, the process is shifted to step R103, and if the predetermined period of time has not passed, the process is shifted to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing to "1" for executing the origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17).

As described above, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories after the start of power supply and the initial operation without being conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored.

Further, according to the modified example of the character product initialization process shown in FIG. 89, after a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, when the power ON command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received, the return operation and initial operation of various characters are performed again. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the main control board 110 has not started normally and the power-on command has been transmitted later than usual (abnormality related to the power line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 has occurred).

When a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time after power supply to the game machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various characters may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it is possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. Here, a case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are changed to alternately light red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED is changed to light in the order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light up in red and white, and the performance button LED lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial motion of the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T4 and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial motion processing is completed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when a performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command at power-on transmitted from a main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is changed to alternately light up in red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED is changed to light up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial motion of the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T4 and the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial motion processing is completed without executing the initial motion of the first movable member 73.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described, but in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed, the setting change-in-progress screen is displayed when the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is received by the effect control board 130. A standby screen is displayed, and return actions and initial actions of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a first power supply restoration designation command as a power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white, and the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED change and light blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration specifying command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED is changed to alternately light blue and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED is changed to light blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a restoration abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.
Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED change and light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed at the timing of T4, and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and the first movable member LED and the production button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started.

Further, when a performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from a main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED is changed to alternately light in blue and white, and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is changed to light in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white, and the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED change and light blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery-in-progress screen including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at the time of power-on, a state in which the number of reservations is not displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E or the second number of reservations display area 70F is maintained because the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-reservation display 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-reservation display 84 and the sub-normal drawing reservation display 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in such a state that a performance image such as a background image can be displayed (a pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "2" and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the variable, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "2".

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power supply line is disconnected to the main control board 110, or power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the disconnection state (including half-inserted state) of the connector of the power line. Second case, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected. Although there are the third case and the like, the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but when the power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At timing T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the return-to-origin processing ends, the initial motion processing starts, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At the time T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 ends. The processing ends, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started in spite of being in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. After that, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the initialization notification sound output is stopped and the state becomes silent.

Although the first standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally is the first case where power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power (only the main power supply) due to the power line being disconnected (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and the third case where the command communication line connector is in the disconnected state (including the half-inserted state). However, the first case will be explained here.

Note that the timings from T1 to T7 are the same as the timings from T1 to T7 in FIG. 99, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started in spite of being in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is an initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and a second standby screen in a state in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains a silent state.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

Although the second standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the second standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power supply restoration designation command is received, a notification sound (such as an alarm) indicating that the power has been turned on (to be comprehensible) may be output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

In FIGS. 99 to 100, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, the return action of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) is performed, but the initial action of the various accessories may be performed without performing the return action.

(Concrete example when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

Cases in which the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received include a case in which power is not supplied to the main control board 110, a case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and a case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 99, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, when the special pattern storage designation command (the first reserved number and the second reserved number=0) is received while the performance control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changed and turned off.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device, but the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). ) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped includes a case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 contacts due to an external factor after disconnection, and a case where the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes disconnected (including half-inserted state) and then becomes connected.

Here, a case will be described where power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of control states in which the production control board 130 can execute productions according to commands.

At the timing of T1, the returning operation of various roles and the customer waiting state after the initial operation are already completed, the image display device displays a second standby screen or a customer waiting demo effect screen in which the initial symbol 70a of ``753'' and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during customer waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display content.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lightly turned into red and white as the initial light, and the production button LED is lit in white as an initial light, and the image display device shows the production pattern 70A, and the special pattern TZ stopped (and the special pattern TZ. The first standing screen in the static display is displayed, and an initialization news sound consisting of an alarm and "RAM clear" is output from the audio output device 9.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the returning motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the waiting-for-customer lighting (white lighting) occurs.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during a control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the execution of the variable effect (loss change effect) or during the execution of the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, the screen displayed on the image display device will not be displayed until the power-on designation command is received at the timing of T4. Except that it is a variable performance screen (losing variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or a big win performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), it is the same as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. It will be.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation of various actors, initial operation, and the output of the initialization newsletter are already waiting after the output of the initialization news, the production pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is suspended (indicated). The 2nd waiting screen or the customer waiting demo production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED are on the waiting button LED.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reservation display 83, the second sub display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the variable performance is finished, or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, the performance button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the initial pattern 753 at the time of power restoration and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed) instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At timing T5, when the return motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the variable effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the variable performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variable display 81, the sub second variable display 82, the sub first holding display 83, the sub second holding display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as an initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as an initial light emission, and the image display device displays a recovery screen including characters "Please restart the game." Display device 84, sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, sub-normal pattern holding display device 86) maintains the display contents.

When the returning motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is an initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and a stop screen in a state in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and a stop sound is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variable performance is a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a such as ``777'' which is a jackpot performance pattern, and a stop screen in a state where the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the sub-first variation display 81 changes to a jackpot display mode indicating a jackpot, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but it may be set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of extinguishing or power restoration, so that it is possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Further, even when the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special symbol determination command, temporary stop display and stop display of the performance pattern 70a are not performed, and the variable display on the sub-first variable display device and the sub-second variable display device is not ended.

(Concrete example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted while the jackpot effect is being executed after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the jackpot performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot performance (here, the first round performance) is being executed, the big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is stopped (still displayed). In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first reservation display 83, the sub second reservation display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reserve display 83, the second sub reserve display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reserve display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for mid-jackets transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, the performance button LED is lighted in white as initial light emission, the image display device displays the screen during return for the middle of jackpot including characters ``Please restart the game (during jackpot)'', and the voice output device 9 is silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) maintains the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 104 may be displayed.

When the returning motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

Thereafter, when a performance control board 130 receives a round designating command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from a main control board 110, a normal big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device instead of the special big win performance (round performance) screen.

When the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the performance control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the normal ending performance screen is displayed.

Also, instead of switching to a normal jackpot performance screen when a round designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, or the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game is finished.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but by turning off the light or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, it may be made possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

In FIGS. 102 to 105, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored, but the initial actions of the various roles may be performed without performing the restoration.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 90 to 105, if the control status of the gaming is initialized, the first initial production pattern ("135"), which is the first combination of identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in multiple production pattern 70A, and the control status of the game is restored. The second initial production pattern ("753"), which is the second combination of identification characters in the pattern 70A, is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display suggesting the resumption of the power supply before displaying the production pattern 70a on the image display device, and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device when recovering to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device after recovery to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory/with hold memory (initial screen +). Display of the screen during recovery) is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, it is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories in each of the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D) and the sub pending display device (sub first pending display device 83, sub second pending display device 84), and when the power supply stopped in the state where there is pending storage is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of power supply on the image display device. While performing (display of the screen during recovery), the suspension display is not executed in the suspension icon display area, but the suspension display can be executed in the sub-suspension display. Thus, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen in which the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when restoring the control state of the game after resuming the power supply without being conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration performance.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82), when the power supply stopped during the variation performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the variation display (blinking display) is not performed during the variation display of the special symbol even if the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the variable display (blinking display) may be performed by the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82). In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84), the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when performing variable display (blinking display) on the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) while the returning screen is being displayed on the image display device, the sub suspension display (sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84) may display the number of suspensions in accordance with the start of this variable display. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of various characters is performed at the same timing as when the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, presentation button LED) of various roles are turned off during the return operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various roles, the abnormality is notified by flashing the light emitting part of the role having the recovery abnormality in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light emitting part of the role object with the return abnormality, the abnormality notification continues until the next fluctuation effect is started. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of various characters is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the board function (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (first sub-suspension display 83, second sub-suspension display 84) changes to a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (recovering screen is displayed on the image display device). are By doing so, it becomes easier to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the frame role (production button 17), in the case of power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (returning screen is displayed on the image display device). By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp the end of the variable performance executed at the time when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various roles are executed, and the initial screen is continued to be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the display of the initial screen is continued due to the inability to receive the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), when the special symbol storage designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the start opening is received from the main control board 110 when the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, the winning sound is output. By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, when the variation start command is received from the main control board 110 after the effect control board 130 becomes a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power supply designation command and the power restoration designation command are received again from the main control board 110, the return operation of the various characters and the initial operation ( initial light emission) is executed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the return operation of the various characters and the initial operation (initial operation) are performed again. light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the completion of the return operation of the various roles and the initial operation (including the initial light emission), when the power supply designation command and the power restoration designation command are received again from the main control board 110, the return operation and the initial operation of the various roles are performed again, for example, by restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 only after stopping. (including initial light emission). By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as a customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the initialization notification sound is output again when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even during the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed, the initialization notification sound is output again when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound may be output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in a control state in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission), when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed, and the main control is performed. When the power restoration designation command is received again from the board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, such as during the return operation of various roles and during the initial operation (including the initial light emission), during the variable performance or during the jackpot performance, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the return screen is displayed instead of the initial screen being displayed. are By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various roles and during the jackpot effect after the completion of the initial operation (including the initial light emission), when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the return for the jackpot is being performed without displaying the initial screen. It is designed to display the screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed or during the jackpot game, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 11 is displayed. When the power restoration designation command is received again from 0, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the performance control board 130 is continued in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, even if the power supply to the performance control board 130 is stopped after the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and the power supply is resumed, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

The control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable performance, and the big win performance.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters) of "1" to "9", but it may be composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decoration part). In addition, the performance pattern 70a may be displayed with numbers and characters in the normal game state, and the performance patterns 70a may be displayed with only numbers or characters smaller than the numbers and the normal game state in the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

Also, three types of production modes A to C may be provided in the normal game state, and at least one of the number design and character design of the production pattern 70a may be different for each production mode. Also, two types of production modes D to E may be provided in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and at least one of the design of the numbers and the design of the characters of the production pattern 70a may be different for each production mode. Furthermore, two types of production modes F to G may be provided in the low-probability short-time gaming state, and at least one of the number design and character design of the production pattern 70a may be changed for each production mode.

In this case, the power supply is stopped in any of the performance modes A to C in the normal game state, and when the power supply is resumed after that and the control state of the game is restored, the performance mode A is surely set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode A is displayed statically without swinging display after the display of the initial screen or the screen during recovery is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the performance mode A is always set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode A is statically displayed without swinging display after the display of the initial screen is finished.

Then, when the power supply is stopped in any of the performance modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and the power supply is resumed after that and the control state of the game is restored, the performance mode D is surely set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode D is statically displayed without swinging display after the display of the initial screen or the screen during recovery is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the performance mode A is always set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode A is statically displayed without swinging display after the display of the initial screen is finished.

Further, when the power supply is stopped in any of the performance modes F to G in the low-probability short-working-time game state, and the power supply is resumed after that and the control state of the game is restored, the performance mode F is surely set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode F is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the end of the display of the initial screen or the screen during recovery. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the performance mode A is always set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode A is statically displayed without swinging display after the display of the initial screen is finished.

Further, when the performance pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the SP ready-to-win performance or the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the normal game state, the performance pattern 70a may be changed to numbers only, and when the SP ready-to-win performance or SPSP ready-to-win performance is completed and the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging display), the performance pattern 70a may be returned to the numbers and characters.

In this case, during the SP reach or SP reach in the normal game state, that is, when the performance pattern 70a is changed to numbers only, the power supply is stopped and then the power supply is resumed to recover the control state of the game, the performance pattern 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the display of the screen during recovery is finished. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

Further, during SP reach or SPSP reach in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), that is, when the power supply is stopped when the performance pattern 70a is only numbers, and then the power supply is resumed to restore the control state of the game, the performance pattern 70a of only the numbers is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the end of the display of the screen during recovery. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

<Content 1 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is established, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. Among such gaming machines, there is one that displays a pending image corresponding to undetermined determination information (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine enhances the interest of the game by changing the normal pending image to the pending image of the display mode suggesting the possibility that the variable effect will result in a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ According to the first configuration for solving the above issues, according to the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game (main control board 110), and a subordinate system that controls the production of the game based on the signal (such as commands (such as commands) above), according to the gaming machine (130m in the production control unit). The lord control means is a judgment method (main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform special gaming (jackpot gaming) that is advantageous to the players, and a holding method that can hold the right to determine (main RAM110C), and the informal control means is a holding image corresponding to the right to be held (Paste Aiko. Display the image display method (display / audio control unit 140) displayed in the display method (1 image display device 70), and the production execution method (display / audio control unit 140) to execute the prescribed reward production (icon generated (change) alarm sound) in the production method (audio output device 9) during the progress of the game. In preparation, the images of the image display are configured to update the image displayed in the displayed means for each time the specified frame update timing, and it is possible to perform a change effect (icon change production) that changes to a special holding image that indicates the possibility of performing special gaming or not from the holding image. The first change production that is executed at the timing of the frame update in accordance with the receipt of a command (a command specified command) of the above -mentioned rights sent from the means, and a command (change pattern specified command specified command) that indicates the result of the criterion sent from the lord control means (a change in the prize) Includes the second change production (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and pattern action change pattern 01) executed at the timing of update, and the procedure of the production execution is the frame update timing when the first change production starts, and the frame that ends the first change. The news of the news is terminated at the timing that is different from the new timing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling the game production based on the signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. CPU 110a), holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, and variation control means for variably displaying a pattern based on the result of the judgment and then stop-displaying the pattern. Effect executing means (display/audio control unit 140) for executing notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), wherein the image display means is configured to update an image displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and it is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game. and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the determination result transmitted from the main control means, wherein the effect execution means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, The notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the sub-control means (performance control section 130m) for controlling the game production based on the signal (command etc.) from the main control means. CPU 110a), holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, and variation control means (main CPU 110a) for variably displaying a pattern and then stop-displaying the pattern based on the result of the judgment. ), and effect execution means (display/sound control unit 140) for causing the effect means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (an icon generation (change) notification sound) in the course of the game, wherein the image display means is configured to update the image displayed on the display means at each predetermined frame update timing, and the possibility of whether or not to perform the special game from the pre-judgment pending image or the post-judgment pending image. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change to a pre-judgment special pending image or a post-determination special hold image shown, and the change effect is a first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at a frame update timing according to a command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the fluctuation display of the pattern is started. The effect execution means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing when the first change effect starts, ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing when the first change effect ends, and makes it so that the ratio of executing the second change effect is higher in the case of changing to the post-judgment special hold image than in the case of changing to the pre-judgment special hold image. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling the game production based on the signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. CPU 110a) and holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding a predetermined number of said judgment rights, and said subordinate control means comprises image display means (display/sound control section 140) for displaying a reserved image (holding icon) corresponding to said reserved right on display means (first image display device 70), and effect execution means (display/sound control section) for causing production means (sound output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the course of a game. 140), wherein the image display means is configured to update an image to be displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and a change effect (icon change effect) for changing the reserved image to a special reserved image indicating the possibility of performing the special game is performed, and the changed effect is performed in response to a command (a start winning designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a special pattern storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of the reserved rights changes. A first change effect (change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) executed at frame update timing, and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. and a second display mode (red character icon) in which the possibility of performing a technique is high, wherein the effect execution means starts the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect starts, ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and changes to the second display mode more easily when the second change effect is executed than when the first change effect is executed, and changes to the second display mode during the first change effect, When the number of reserved rights is a second number larger than the first number, the possibility of playing the special game is higher than when the number is the first number. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The “special pending image” and the “pre-judgment special pending image” include those in which the shape of the normal pending icon is changed, those in which the color is changed, the effect of the color indicating the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot around the pending icon, the one that displays a character indicating the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot around (near) the pending icon, and the one that displays a character image (for example, “SP” or “pseudo-ren”) that suggests the effect to be executed around (near) the pending icon.

In addition, the ``post-judgment special pending image'' includes an image in which the shape of the normal icon is changed, an image in which the color is changed, an effect in which a color effect indicating the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is displayed around the icon, an image in which a character indicating the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is displayed around (near) the icon, and a character image (e.g., "SP" or "pseudo-run") that suggests an effect to be executed is displayed around (near) the icon.

Also, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Also, the “second display mode” includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

The ``post-judgment pending image'' and the ``post-judgment special pending image'' include those displayed from the start to the end of the variable performance, those displayed only for a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance, and those whose display is erased during a specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the change performance.

<Content 2 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional game machine, it is common to store determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition as a holding memory, determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the determination information, and execute a variable performance based on the determination result. Among such gaming machines, by increasing display or decreasing display of the reserved image corresponding to each reserved memory, or displaying the execution image corresponding to the reserved memory in which the variable effect is executed, There was a game machine that allows the player to grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories changes.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start opening), the special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image every predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), and the information display means is capable of executing reduced display of the first reserved information and reduced display of the second reserved information when the number of the reserved memories decreases, and the frame update timing at which the reduced display of the first reserved information (update to the reserved number decremented by 1) is completed before the frame update timing at which the reduced display of the second reserved information (movement to the center of the next display section in the reserved icon display area) is completed. is faster. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine provided with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of performing decreasing display of the first pending information and changing display of changing the second pending information in which the variable effect is started to execution information (the icon) when the number of the pending memories decreases, and the display of the change of the second pending information to the execution information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed before the first frame update timing. The frame update timing at which the decrement display of the pending information (update to the pending number decremented by 1) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. The subordinate control means comprises a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not yet been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (a pending number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second pending information (a pending icon) showing an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories. The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first hold information and displaying a decrease in the second hold information when the number of the hold memories decreases, and when the number of the hold memories increases, can execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information. Even before the frame update timing at which the movement to the center of the adjacent display part in the pending icon display area) is completed, the increasing display of the first pending information (update to the pending number incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of performing decreasing display of the first pending information and changing display of changing the second pending information whose variable display is started to execution information (the icon) when the number of the pending memories decreases, and executing increasing display of the first pending information and increasing display of the second pending information when the number of the pending memories increases, and during the changing display of the second pending information. When the number of reserved memories increases, the increased display of the first reserved information (update to the reserved number incremented by 1) is started even before the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second reserved information (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine provided with main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the game production based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start opening), is a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of executing an increased display of the first reserved information and an increased display of the second reserved information when the number of the reserved memories increases, and when the number of the reserved memories increases during execution of the variable effect, the increased display of the second reserved information (enlargement of the reserved icon additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area to a normal size) is completed, and the first reserved information is increased before the frame update timing. The frame update timing that results in the completion of the display (update to the pending digits incremented by 1) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The variable performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (SP ready-to-play performance, SPSP ready-to-win performance, all-rotation ready-to-win performance) that expects execution of the special game during execution of the variable performance, and the information display means is capable of executing an increased display of the first pending information and an increased display of the second pending information when the number of the pending memories increases, and when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, the increased display of the first pending information (update to the pending number incremented by 1) is executed. , The increase display of the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is established (the specific effect is completed, the losing effect pattern or the big win effect pattern displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and subordinate control means (production control board 130) that controls the game production based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start opening), is a special game that is advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device), and first pending information (reserved number) indicating the number of the pending memories. and second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, wherein the information display means can execute an increase display of the first holding information and an increase display of the second holding information when the number of the holding memories increases, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting port) as the first holding memory, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second starting port). When the number of the first reserved memories increases in the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved information (updating to the reserved number incremented by 1) is executed, but the increased display of the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the last variable performance in the specific game state is completed, and the normal game state is returned to). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to judge whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute the special game according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (operating, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped, and initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of power supply (initial action, Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission) and effecting the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during execution of the game, and the effect control means is adapted to change the operation mode (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) of the initial operation between when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by a player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped, and perform initial light emission of the operation means after power supply is started, and perform effect light emission of the operation means during the execution of the game. A performance control means (a performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game is provided, and the performance control means changes the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission between when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before power supply is stopped, and initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after power supply is started. and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of effecting the effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means makes the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means the same (operation mode of the number of steps, operation of each step, etc.) when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, but makes the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect means different (light emission mode, etc.). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and playing the game. wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means makes at least part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable effect means the same when the game control state is initialized and when the game control state is restored, but the second movable effect means The light emission modes of the initial light emission in the effect means are made different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an initial processing means (main control board 11) that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped. 0), and an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect patterns displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, the plurality of effect patterns include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that allow each to be identified, and the effect control means, when the control state of the game is initialized, puts the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns displayed on the display means into a first combination (e.g., " 135"), and when the game control state is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means are set to the second combination (for example, "753"). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional game machine generally initializes the control state of a game after power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of movable effect means after power supply is started (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the movable effect means may not be able to perform a suitable initial action.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the game control state after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and power supply control. A presentation control means (a presentation control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of the game and performing a presentation operation of the movable presentation means during execution of the game, wherein the presentation control means is configured to perform the initial operation after returning the movable presentation means to the first position when the movable presentation means is at the second position at the start of power supply (recovery of the power supply) at which the game control state is restored. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position close to the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped, and power supply control. an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the game is started and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means performs a return operation of the movable effect means to the first position when the movable effect means is at the second position at the start of power supply (power supply restoration) at which the game control state is restored; If it does not return to the position, the initial operation is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after starting the game and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74); When the 2 movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the second movable effect means is performed without the initial action of the first movable effect means. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after starting the game and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74); When the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the second movable effect means does not perform the initial action. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and power supply control. Effect control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the game is started, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is at the second position at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. When the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the second movable effect means is performed without performing the initial action of the first movable effect means. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and power supply control. an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the start and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) having a portion overlapping a second position of the first movable effect means and its own second position; When the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position when the supply is started (power is turned on), the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the second movable effect means is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply stopped during the variable presentation is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an initial processing means (main control board 11) that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped. 0) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and in the variable performance, the performance symbols being variably displayed can be oscillatingly displayed (temporary stop display) and then statically displayed (stopped display), and the performance control means resumes the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable performance of oscillatingly displaying the performance symbols. When the control state is restored, it is possible to statically display the performance symbols on the display means at a predetermined timing (at the time of receiving the special symbol determination command, at the time of receiving the customer waiting command) without swinging the performance symbols. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the game ball enters the start hole), a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and after the power supply is started, the game control state is initialized or restored to the state before the power supply was stopped. and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of production patterns displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the variable production includes a ready-to-win fluctuation production that executes a ready-to-win production by forming and displaying a ready-to-win state based on some of the production patterns. When the technique control state is restored, at a predetermined timing (at the time of receiving the special pattern determination command, at the time of receiving the customer waiting command), the combination of the performance patterns different from the ready-to-win combination of the performance patterns forming and displaying the ready-to-win state can be displayed on the display means in a stationary state. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting port) as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and a game after the start of power supply. or to restore the state before stopping the power supply, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. , a second state that is the execution period of the variable effect in the state with the reserved memory, wherein the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means when the control state of the game is restored, the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the power supply stopped in the first state or the second state is resumed. The display mode of the specific display (display of initial screen + screen during recovery) when recovering to state 1 or state 2 is made different. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Content 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on the display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start port), and initializing the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped. and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, the production control means is capable of executing a customer waiting production (customer waiting demonstration production) on the display means after a predetermined period of time has passed after the production design is statically displayed on the display means, and after the elapse of the fluctuation time of the variable production. The period until the customer waiting performance is executed can be made different between the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed at the beginning and the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored. By doing so, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Content 8 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to determination information during execution of a variable effect on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start port), and initializing the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped. and an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. 70C), it is possible to display execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information during execution of the variable performance, and when the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which a performance image such as a background image can be displayed) from the end of the specific display to the start of the next variable display, but the execution information is not displayed in the predetermined display area. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

(Content 9 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a pre-reading advance notice effect over a plurality of variable effects based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the pre-reading notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information; Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before power supply was stopped; Based on the determination result, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading foretelling performance (continuous foretelling performance) over a plurality of times of the variable performance, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the fore-reading foretelling performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the fore-reading foretelling performance is not restarted, and in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance for which the power supply is stopped, the fore-reading foretelling performance (for example, alternative foretelling performance) different from the foreseeing foretelling performance can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice performance due to the stoppage of the power supply, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Content 10 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Preliminary determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information, initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the judgment means (production control board 130). It is possible to execute a specific performance (e.g., an icon change performance) stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of the special game over the performance, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply is stopped, but it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the stop of the power supply. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 11 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each piece of determination information for which the execution of the variable effect has not ended (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, there is a possibility that the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed increases.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Preliminary determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information, initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the judgment means (production control board 130), wherein the production control means executes the variable production. It is possible to display identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not ended and the determination information that has not started the variable effect, and by changing the display mode of the identification information in stages, it is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. The display mode includes a first stage mode (e.g., CD icon), a second stage mode (e.g., blue character icon), and a third stage mode (red character icon). When the power supply stopped during the display in the second stage mode of the identification information that changes up to the third stage mode is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

(Content 12 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of pending memories, which is determination information for which determination has not been performed, in a display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of reserved memories, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting port) as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and a game after the start of power supply. Initialization means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of or restoring it to the state before stopping the power supply, and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. , In each of the first display area (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84), and the second display area (first suspension icon display area 70B, second suspension icon display area 70D) different from the first display area, it is possible to perform a suspension display indicating the number of suspension memories, and when the power supply stopped with the suspension storage is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspension display is not performed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. The hold display can be executed in the first display area. Thus, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Content 13 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game may decrease when the stopped power supply is resumed during the effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the control state of the game is restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information, initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before power supply was stopped, production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the judgment means (production control board 130), and light emitting means (input) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes. The effect control means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation for execution of the special game by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and when the power supply stopped during execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emission means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player is puzzled such that the lamp change performance is restarted even though the variation performance is not executed while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

(Content 14 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional game machine generally comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, wherein the effect control means comprises the movable effect. It is possible to execute the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, and said effect control means comprises said movable effect. It is possible to execute an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and an effect operation (effect operation, light emission of effect) of the movable effect means, and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a waiting state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and it is possible to execute the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the customer waiting effect. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, wherein the effect control means comprises the movable effect. It is possible to execute an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and an effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and it is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the variable effect, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, and said effect control means comprises said movable effect. It is possible to execute the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and it is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and when a predetermined signal (power supply designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the special game effect, the initial operation can be executed. . By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and control of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the state or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is capable of executing the effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means. However, the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is the same, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation of the movable effect means can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device) and based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the winning of the game ball to the starting port), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. The effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the movable effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and in accordance with the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the variable effect is displayed by swinging (temporary stop display). When the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern, the effect control means can statically display the effect symbol on the display means without oscillating display at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special symbol confirmation command, when receiving a customer waiting command), and during the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as a reserved memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to the state before stopping the power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring, the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). , a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the reserved memory, and a second state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state with the reserved memory, wherein when the game control state is restored, the performance control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means, and when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display when the power supply stopped during the first state or the second state is resumed and the power supply stopped during the first state or the second state is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored (display of the initial screen + the screen during recovery), and it is possible to execute the production according to the signal (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) It is possible. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as a reserved memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to the state before stopping the power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoration, and the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect with a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the effect is displayed on the display means. When a predetermined period elapses after the symbols are statically displayed, a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) can be executed by the display means, and the period until the performance pattern is statically displayed after the variation time of the variable effect has passed and the effect pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, and the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the jackpot performance), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as a reserved memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to the state before stopping the power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoration, and the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). Based on the result, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading advance notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a plurality of times of the variable effect, and when the control state of the game is restored by resuming the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, alternative notice effect) different from the pre-reading notice effect in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the pre-reading notice effect, and a control state (customer waiting state, customer waiting state, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the variable performance, jackpot performance), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect buttons 17, various LEDs, voice output devices) capable of operating (movement, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. 9, image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as pending storage, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or the state before stopping the power supply. and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the original state, and the effect control means can execute the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., an icon change effect) that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the effect, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specific effect can be executed in the variable effect that is executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes, and effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device), determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the start opening) as a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (main control board 110), and start of power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game later or restores the state before the power supply is stopped, and the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). When the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect, the light emitting means is controlled to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect according to the signal can be executed. It is possible to By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) of the game, and the effect control means is capable of outputting power supply from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound indicating the start (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.), and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which an effect according to the signal can be executed, the predetermined notification sound can be output. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) of the game, and the effect control means supplies power from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start, and to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), wherein the production control means is capable of outputting power supply from the audio output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start, and to execute a variable effect for informing whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the variable effect, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), wherein the production control means supplies power from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound indicating the start (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.), and during execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Special game effects (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) can be executed, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the special game effect, the predetermined notification sound can be output. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

(Content 15 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying effect images (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means is continued.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying effect images (fluctuation effects, jackpot effects, etc.), and the effect control means is in a standby state (customer waiting state). state), it is possible to display a game standby screen (a static display screen of performance symbols) on the display means, and when the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display of the game standby screen, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

(Content 16 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not appropriately performed.

◇ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (disconnected connector, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) when the control means and the detection means are started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and power is being supplied to the game machine. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (disconnection of the connector, wire breakage, etc.), it is possible to issue a predetermined anomaly report (disconnection report, magnetic anomaly report, radio anomaly report, etc.). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine capable of playing a game is equipped with detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means become disconnected (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to the high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after all the jackpot games are finished, but the game machine may shift to the high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is finished when the game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of the jackpot game.

Alternatively, the game machine may shift to a high-probability game state after all jackpot games are finished, and terminate the high-probability game state and return to a normal game state when winning a falling lottery executed at the start of variable display of special symbols in the high-probability game state.

In addition, when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the normal pattern, the game machine may shift to a low-probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and shift to the high-probability game state continuing until the next jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game when the type of the jackpot special pattern is the specific pattern.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not performed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 game machine 5 game board 44 normal figure gate 45 first starting port 47 second starting port 50 big prize winning port 70 first image display device 71 second image display device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a game machine that can play games,
detection means for detecting a predetermined event;
a first control means for performing predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means;
a second control means for performing control according to a signal from the first control means;
a display means for displaying a game effect image and executing a variable effect that variably displays a plurality of effect symbols;
The detection means is
a first detection means for detecting a game medium;
a second detection means for detecting magnetic or radio waves ;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the initial operation of the movable effect means operable on the player side rather than the display means can be executed, and the plurality of effect patterns can be displayed after the predetermined image is displayed on the display means,
When the first control means and the second detection means are in a disconnected state when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification can be executed,
When a predetermined signal line connecting the first control means and the second control means is disconnected while power is being supplied to the game machine, the predetermined abnormality notification is not executed,
The predetermined abnormality notification based on the disconnection state between the first control means and the second detection means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started is started after the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, but the plurality of performance symbols are displayed even during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification,
When the first control means and the second detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period of time ,
The game machine is characterized in that, when the first control means and the second detection means are in a disconnected state when power supply to the game machine is started, the initial operation of the movable presentation means and the predetermined abnormality notification can be executed.

Images